OWNER’S MANUAL
2018
FIAT
®
500L
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name
FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manu-
factured.
Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION ...................................................................3
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS ......................................................7
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................13
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . .........................................89
5
SAFETY ........................................................................115
6
STARTINGANDOPERATING.........................................................173
7
INCASEOFEMERGENCY ...........................................................207
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .....................................................241
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................291
10
MULTIMEDIA ....................................................................301
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ............................................................327
12
INDEX..........................................................................333
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured
that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styl-
ing, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been
prepared with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation and mainte-
nance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty
Information, and customer oriented documents. In the
attached Warranty Booklet, you will find a description of
the services that FCA offers to its customers, the Warranty
Certificate and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of
these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for
the first time. Following the instructions, recommenda-
tions, tips, and important warnings in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particu-
larly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will
improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle.
Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or
versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore,
you should only consider the information which is related
to the trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Own-
er’s Information, that may or may not be applicable to your
vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help
you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA aims at
a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this
reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For
further information, contact an authorized dealer.
NOTE: After reviewing the Owner’s Information, it should
be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing, and
remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that an authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
4 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items
of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustra-
tions may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose sym-
bols indicate precautions to be observed when using this
component. Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against oper-
ating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against
procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If
you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may
lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
1
INTRODUCTION 5
FRONT VIEW
Front View
1 — Hood / Engine Compartment 4 — Exterior Mirror
2 — Headlight 5 — Door Handle
3 — Windshield 6 — Wheel / Tire
8 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
REAR VIEW
Rear View
1 — Rear Lights
2 — Rear Windshield Wiper
3 — Liftgate
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 9
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents 4 — Instrument Cluster
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons 5 — Windshield Wiper Lever
3 — Steering Wheel 6 — Radio
10 GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTERIOR
Interior
1 — Seats 4 — Climate Controls
2 — Gear Selector 5 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Radio 6 — Lower Glove Compartment
2
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 KEYS .................................16
▫ Key With Remote Control..................16
䡵 IGNITION SWITCH .......................18
▫ Ignition Switch .........................18
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder .................20
䡵 SENTRY KEY ...........................20
▫ Customer Key Programming ...............20
▫ Replacement Keys .......................20
▫ General Information .....................21
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM ...............21
▫ To Arm The System .....................21
▫ To Disarm The System ....................22
▫ Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped............................22
䡵 DOORS ...............................23
▫ Power Door Locks ......................23
▫ Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open .....25
▫ Auto-Relocking (Only For Rear Doors).........25
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors) .25
䡵 SEATS ................................26
▫ Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) ............26
▫ Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............29
▫ Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped . .30
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ................31
▫ Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ................32
▫ Rear Armrest — If Equipped ...............34
䡵 HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................34
▫ Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats .......34
3
▫ Rear Head Restraint Adjustment ............36
▫ Front Head Restraint Removal ..............36
▫ Rear Head Restraint Removal ...............37
䡵 STEERING WHEEL .......................37
▫ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ............37
䡵 MIRRORS ..............................38
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror ..................38
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped .....38
▫ Conversation Mirror — If Equipped ..........39
▫ Power Mirrors .........................40
▫ Folding Mirrors .........................40
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .............41
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .....41
䡵 EXTERIOR LIGHTS .......................42
▫ Headlights ............................42
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .......43
▫ High Beams ...........................43
▫ Flash-To-Pass ..........................43
▫ Parking Lights .........................43
▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay ...........43
▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .............44
▫ Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights..........44
䡵 INTERIOR LIGHTS .......................45
▫ Interior Lights Controls ...................45
䡵 WIPERS AND WASHERS ...................47
▫ Front Wiper Operation ....................47
▫ Rear Wiper/Washer Operation ..............49
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS .....................51
▫ Manual Climate Control Overview ...........51
▫ Automatic Climate Control Overview .........55
▫ Climate Control Functions .................59
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .............................60
▫ Operating Tips .........................61
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 WINDOWS .............................63
▫ Power Windows ........................63
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................65
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ..........65
▫ Opening ..............................66
▫ Closing ...............................66
▫ Anti-Pinch Protect Feature .................66
▫ Sunroof Reinitialization ...................67
▫ Wind Buffeting .........................67
▫ Power Sun Blind ........................67
䡵 HOOD ................................68
▫ Opening .............................68
▫ Closing ..............................69
䡵 LIFTGATE .............................70
▫ Opening .............................70
▫ Cargo Area Features .....................71
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED .....77
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink .....77
▫ Programming A Rolling Code ...............78
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code ...........79
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ........80
▫ Using HomeLink ........................81
▫ Security ..............................81
▫ Troubleshooting Tips .....................81
▫ General Information......................82
䡵 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...................82
▫ Storage ...............................82
▫ Cupholders ...........................84
▫ Power Outlets .........................85
▫ Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ...............86
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .......86
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
KEYS
Key With Remote Control
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) key fob contains an
integrated key. To use the mechanical key, simply push the
mechanical key release button.
NOTE: The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to
unlock the driver’s door or twice, within five seconds, to
unlock all doors, and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all
doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Locking Doors With A Key
1. Insert the key with either side up.
2. Turn the key to the right to lock the door.
3. Turn the key to the left to unlock the door.
Integrated Key
1 — Mechanical Key Release
Button
3 — Lock Button
2 — Unlock Button 4 — Liftgate Button
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Replacing The Battery In The Key With Remote
Control
To replace the battery, proceed as follows:
1. Push mechanical release button to open the mechanical
key.
2. Turn the screw to unlock using a small screwdriver.
3. Take out the battery case and replace the battery making
sure that polarities are correct.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key and lock it turning
the screw to lock.
NOTE: Used batteries should be properly disposed of as
specified by law, see an authorized dealer for assistance
needed.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Refer to “Sentry Key” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”
for further information.
If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact an
authorized dealer for details.
Request For Additional Remote Controls
The system can recognize up to eight remote controls.
Should a new remote control be necessary, go to an
authorized dealer, taking an ID document and the car
ownership documents.
Key Fob Components
1 — Mechanical Key
2 — Mechanical Key Release Button
3 — Battery
4 — Battery Case
5—Screw
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Ignition Switch
The ignition switch can be turned to three different posi-
tions:
• STOP: engine off, key can be removed. Some electrical
devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking system,
etc.) can operate.
NOTE: The transmission must be shifted into PARK before
the key is turned to the OFF position. Then, the key can be
removed.
• AVV: engine start-up.
• MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are en-
abled.
If the key is turned to the OFF/LOCK position before
shifting into park, the key will have to be moved to the
driving (MAR) position and back to OFF/LOCK. Then, the
key can be removed.
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking
brake, then turn the engine OFF, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
Ignition Switch
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 3 — AVV (START)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition switch position is in the OFF/LOCK
position, a signal sounds to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the vehicle. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized ve-
hicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition
switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is turned to
the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it indicates that there
is a problem with the electronics.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once a
Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle. When having the Sen-
try Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle
keys with you to an authorized dealer.
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2.
This device must accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors for
unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unauthor-
ized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is armed,
interior switches for door locks and liftgate release are
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or
turn signals will flash, and the vehicle security light on the
instrument panel will flash.
To Arm The System
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of
the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the Central Lock/Unlock
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry key fob and close all
doors.
3. The horn will sound and the vehicle security light in the
instrument cluster will switch on for approximately
three seconds. This shows that the vehicle security
alarm is about to arm. During this period, if a door is
opened, the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN, or
the power door locks are unlocked in any manner, the
vehicle security alarm will automatically disarm. After
approximately three seconds, the vehicle security light
will flash. This shows that the vehicle security alarm is
fully armed.
The activation of the vehicle security alarm is followed by
a self-diagnosis stage. If a fault is detected during the
self-diagnosis stage, the horn will sound a second time.
If the horn sounds a second time, check that all doors, hood
and liftgate are closed correctly, then rearm the system.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
If the vehicle security alarm sounds the horn a second time
even when all doors, hood and liftgate are correctly closed,
a fault has occurred in the operation of the system. Contact
an authorized dealer.
To Disarm The System
Push unlock on the key fob, or insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to the ON/
RUN position.
NOTE: The vehicle security alarm will not disarm when
the metal insert of the key is used on a single door lock
cylinder.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
vehicle security alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain
in the vehicle and lock the doors with the key fob, once the
vehicle security alarm is armed, when you pull the door
handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, push the
unlock button on the key fob to disarm the vehicle security
alarm.
Central Lock/Unlock (Switch Safe Lock Device) —
If Equipped
This safety device prevents the operation of the interior
door handles and the door locking/unlocking button.
It prevents the opening of the doors from inside the
passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to break-in
attempts (e.g. broken window).
We recommend that you activate the Safe Lock device each
time you park your car.
Safe Lock Device Location
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Activating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device is enabled on all the doors by quickly
double-pushing the lock button on the key fob.
The direction indicators flash three times and the LED
above the button flashes to indicate that the Safe Lock
device has been activated. If one or more of the doors are
not closed correctly, the Safe Lock device will not activate,
preventing a person from getting stuck inside the passen-
ger compartment by entering the car through, and then
closing, the open door.
Deactivating The Safe Lock Device
The Safe Lock device deactivates automatically:
1. By pushing the unlock button on the key fob.
2. By turning the ignition key to the MAR position.
DOORS
Power Door Locks
Push the central lock/unlock button located on the instru-
ment panel, in the switch bank below the radio. The button
has an LED that indicates whether the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• LED ON: Doors locked. Pushing the central lock/unlock
button once will unlock all doors. The LED will switch
off once the doors are unlocked.
• LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Pushing the central lock/
unlock button once will lock all doors. The LED will
switch on once the doors are locked.
Once the doors have been locked with the key fob, it will
no longer be possible to unlock them by pushing central
lock/unlock button.
Central Lock/Unlock Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
With central locking active (LED ON), opening one of
the front doors, it is possible to perform a central unlocking
(LED OFF). With central locking active (LED ON), in order to
open one of the rear passenger doors, it is necessary pulling
the internal door handle twice. With one of the rear door open
(LED OFF), the unlocking is performed only for that door, not
for all the vehicle.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door handle to
the first detent. If the rear doors are locked, you must pull
the door handle once to unlock the door and pull the door
handle a second time to open the door.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK or the manual transmission
into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake,
turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from vehicle,
and lock all doors. and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the key from the ignition and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Doors Lock With One Or More Doors Open
It is possible to lock the vehicle using the Remote Keyless
Entry, internal button, or external key fob. The vehicle can
also be locked if one or more doors are open. At lock
command request, LED is switched ON. At closing of the
last door, the vehicle maintains the central locking status if
key is not inserted in Ignition Device, otherwise the vehicle
will be unlocked and the LED will be switched OFF.
NOTE: If the key is not inserted in the ignition switch, but
is inside the vehicle, the system does not recognize the
presence of the key and after the closing of last door, the
vehicle remains locked.
Auto-Relocking (Only For Rear Doors)
With the vehicle locked and all doors closed (LED ON), if
a passenger opens one of the rear doors (LED OFF), as soon
as the door is closed, it will be locked again (LED ON).
Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with Child-
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the key into the lock and rotate
clockwise to the lock position or counter clockwise to
unlock position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from
the outside with the Child-Protection locks are en-
gaged (locked).
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, unlock the
doors using the central unlock button, roll down the
window and open the door using the exterior handle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
In a collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats)
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired
position is reached. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Seat Height Adjustment
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat
height or push downward on the lever to lower the seat
height.
Adjusting Bar
Height Adjustment Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat.
To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean
back to the desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward
and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seatback is in
the upright position.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted, and you could be severely injured
or killed. Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
seat belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a
collision, you could slide under the seat belt and be
severely injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
Recline Lever
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)
Rear Seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near
the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the desired
position is reached. Then, using body pressure, move
forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts
and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death
could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Adjusting Bar
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Reclining Rear Seats
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle,
lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In
a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which
could result in serious injury or death.
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) — If Equipped
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Push the power lumbar switch to adjust the lumbar
support. Release the switch when you reach the desired
position.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
Power Lumbar Switch
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats may
be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the outer side of the seat.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Heated Seat Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to
reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and posi-
tioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
1. Lift the seatback release lever located on the upper
outboard side of the seat.
2. Fold the seatback forward.
NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat cush-
ion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left folded for
an extended period of time. This is normal and by simply
opening the seats to the open position, over time the seat
cushion will return to its normal shape.
3. Locate the seatback recline lever on the outboard side of
the seat and lift upward on the lever.
Seatback Release Lever
Seatback Folded
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Slowly flip the entire seat forward. 5. Slowly flip the entire seat rearward and firmly lock the
seat into position.
6. Raise the rear seatback and firmly lock the seatback into
position.
Seatback Recline Lever Folding Rear Seat
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Rear Armrest — If Equipped
To use the armrest, fold it downward.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver, should not oper-
ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event of a
collision.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints. In the event of a rear impact, the
Reactive Head Restraints will automatically extend for-
ward, minimizing the gap between the back of the occu-
pant’s head and the Reactive Head Restraint.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Folding Rear Seat Armrest
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Reactive Head Restraints will automatically return to
their normal position following a rear impact. If the
Reactive Head Restraints do not return to their normal
position, see an authorized dealership immediately.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints,
the outboard head restraints have two comfort positions,
while the central head restraint has to be used in the raised
position. When there are no occupants in the center seat,
the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
for the driver. When the center seat is being occupied, the
head restraint has to be in the raised position.
To raise the outboard head restraints, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraints, push the
adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to “Occu-
pant Restraints System” in “Safety.”
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it can go then
push the adjustment button, and the release button at the
base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To
reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into
the holes and push downward. Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to
the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional
clearance to the back of the head.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
Adjustment Buttons
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraint Removal
NOTE: If the center rear head restraint requires removal,
see an authorized dealer.
To remove the outboard head restraints, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then,
adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to
occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
re-installation instructions above prior to operating
the vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the
steering column. The tilt/telescoping control handle is
located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle down.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel upward
or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
desired. To lock the steering column in position, push the
control handle up until fully engaged.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a
twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield.
The mirror installs on the windshield button with a coun-
terclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while the small control under the mirror is set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by
pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the
left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the
button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving
in REVERSE.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Conversation Mirror — If Equipped
There is a conversation mirror located at the top of the
overhead console.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Conversation Mirror Location
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
To access the conversation mirror, pull downward on the
mirror until it reaches the open position.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door
trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward
the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control
wand in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to
the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot
forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has
three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rear-
ward.
Conversation Mirror Power Mirror Controls
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To
use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing
the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired posi-
tion.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” Feature
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlights
The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the
steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights,
headlight high beams, lane change assist and turn signals.
NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the
ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward
to the first detent for headlight operation.
NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
Multifunction Lever
Headlight Operation
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the
end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol.
NOTE: The low beams and side/tail lights will not be on
with DRL.
The DRL function can be turned on or off through the
touchscreen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
High Beams
With the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle)
to turn on the high beams. The lever will remain forward in
a fixed position and the telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster display. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the
high beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain
on, until the lever is released.
Parking Lights
To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or
turn the ignition to STOP (OFF/LOCK) position
and turn on the headlights.
NOTE: If the parking lights are left on and the key is in the
stop position with the door open, an audible chime will
sound and a message will show in the instrument cluster
display. The chime will stop as soon as the door is closed or
the lights are switched off.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for a preset period of time after
the engine is turned OFF.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction lever toward
the steering wheel within two minutes. Each time the lever
is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to a
maximum of 210 seconds.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel and
hold it for more than two seconds.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center stack
of the instrument panel, just below the radio.
Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights
on. Push the switch a second time to turn the front fog
lights off.
Courtesy Lights/Approaching Lights
This feature allows the driver to locate the vehicle when
parked in dark areas. It can be enabled through the
Uconnect system.
Through the Uconnect menu, the driver can choose be-
tween the following activation times: 0, 30, 60, or 90
seconds.
To switch off the feature, select 0 seconds.
When the vehicle is unlocked, the low beams and parking
lights will turn on for the time specified. Once the door is
opened, the lights will remain on for an additional three
minutes, or until all doors are closed. Once all doors are
closed, the lights will turn off after ten seconds.
The lights can also be turned off by:
• Locking the door.
• Placing the ignition in the START or RUN position.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Interior Lights Controls
The interior light switches are located in the overhead
console. The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right
Position).
Using the switch on the bottom of the overhead console,
push the switch to the on/right position from its center
position and the lights are always on.
Push the switch to the off/left position from its center
position and the lights are always off.
On/Right Position
Off/Left Position
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Leave the switch in the center position, and the lights are
turned on and off when the doors are opened or closed.
The switches on the left and right sides of the overhead
console controls the map or reading function of the lights.
Push the switch to the right to turn on the right light and
push the switch to the left to turn on the left light.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch
is in the center position or that the lights are off to
avoid draining the battery.
Center Position
Map/Reading Light Switches
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Timing (Center Position)
There are four different modes of operation that can be
activated in this position:
• When one door is opened, a three minute timer is
activated.
• When the key is removed from the ignition (within two
minutes of the ignition being turned OFF), a 10 second
timer is activated.
• When the doors are unlocked with the key fob, a 10
second timer is activated.
• When the doors are locked with the key fob, the lights
will turn off.
Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position)
When all doors are closed, a 15 minute timer is activated.
NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved
into the ON/RUN position.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right
side of the steering column.
NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate
with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
Front Wiper Operation
There are five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be
raised or lowered to access these modes.
Windshield Wiper Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Windshield Wiper Off
This is the normal position of the wiper lever.
Intermittent Wiper System
Intermittent Low Speed —
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first detent for
low intermittent speed to operate the wipers with a fixed
pause of ten seconds.
Intermittent High Speed —
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent for
high intermittent speed to operate the wipers with a delay
that is dependent on the speed of the vehicle.
Low Continuous Speed — LO
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third detent to
operate the wipers at a low continuous speed.
High Continuous Speed — HI
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the fourth detent to
operate the wipers at a high continuous speed.
Front Windshield Washer Operation
Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate
automatically for three cycles after the lever is released.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind-
shield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in
any position other than off.
(Continued)
Front Windshield Washer Operation
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Manual High Speed/Mist
Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers
will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until
the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers
will return to the off position and automatically shut off.
Rear Wiper/Washer Operation
Activation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring upward to
operate the rear window wiper as follows:
• In intermittent mode, when the front windshield wiper
is not operating and the lever is in the
(intermittent)
position.
• In synchronous mode (at half the speed of the front
window wiper), when the front windshield wiper is
operating and the lever is in the
(intermittent)
position, or when the reverse gear is engaged, the
front windshield wiper is operating, and the lever is
in the O (off) position.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
• In continuous mode, when the lever is in the
(con-
tinuous) position.
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward activates the
rear window washer. Keep the windshield wiper lever
pushed for more than half a second to activate the rear
window wiper as well. Releasing the windshield wiper
lever will activate the smart washing function.
Deactivation
The function stops when the windshield wiper lever is
released.
Rear Window Wiper Operation
Rear Window Washer Operation
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the
A/C system is engaged.
Manual Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotat-
ing the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures.
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Blower Control
There are seven blower speeds. Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise
from the off position.
NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower
speeds.
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
NOTE: Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the
panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Icon Description
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works
best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good
for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Front Defrost
Mode
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the knob clockwise to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging.
Additional Electric Heater — If Equipped
The additional electric heater ensures more rapid passen-
ger compartment heating.
It activates in cold weather conditions, if the following
conditions are verified:
• Outside temperature low;
• Engine coolant temperature low;
• Engine on;
• Fan speed set to 1st speed;
• Temperature Control knob turned completely clockwise
to red section.
The heater is switched off when at least one of the
conditions above is no longer verified.
NOTE: The power of the electric heater is modulated
according to the battery voltage.
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Per-
forming this function again will cause the A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the
A/C indicator will turn off.
Automatic Climate Controls
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air
mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present.
NOTE:
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fog-
ging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on
the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for
maximum defogging.
•
Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and
amount. Performing this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illumi-
nates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maxi-
mum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Per-
forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. If the front defrost mode
is turned off the climate system will return the previous setting.
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon Description
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window de-
froster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after twenty minutes.
Passenger Temperature Knob
Provides the passenger with independent temperature control. Rotate the knob clockwise for
warmer temperature settings. Rotate the knob counterclockwise for cooler temperature settings.
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move with the driver’s tem-
perature. Acting on the passenger’s temperature will cause the Sync feature turn off.
Blower Control Knob
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There
are eight blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using the blower control knob on
the faceplate. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from
the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Mode Control: Below are the modes of air distribution that can be selected individually, or in combination with each
other to reach a desired distribution mode.
Windshield Mode
Windshield Mode
Air comes from the outlets directed at the windshield meant for defrosting, and side window
demisting. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel lo-
cated below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
Climate Control Power Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control on/off.
Driver Temperature Knob
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Rotate the knob clockwise for
warmer temperature settings. Rotate the knob counterclockwise for cooler temperature settings.
When the SYNC feature is active, the driver’s temperature will also manage the passenger’s
temperature.
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
System Maintenance
In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at
least once a month for about ten minutes.
Have the system inspected at an authorized dealership
before the summer.
NOTE: The system uses R-1234yf coolant which does not
pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage.
Under no circumstances is the use of R-134a allowed.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to
manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning sys-
tem. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the
cabin. For improved fuel economy, push the A/C button to
turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the
blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select
only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located
in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of
the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity,
or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate
interior air by pushing the Recirculation control button.
The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button
is selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead
to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature
may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out)
if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls,
the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED
light in the control button to blink and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the temperature control but-
tons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system achieves and automatically maintains that com-
fort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units
by selecting the US/Metric customer-programmable fea-
ture.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan remains on low
until the engine warms up. The blower increases in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the pres-
ence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode
must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side
glass.
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning
properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended, because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e.,
vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning
system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again. If you are leaving
your vehicle dormant for more than four weeks, disconnect
the negative cable from the battery. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further infor-
mation.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select De-
frost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do
not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from
the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin
air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDOWS
Power Windows
Power Window Controls
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
passenger door, which operate the front passenger window
and a single switch on each rear door that operates the rear
passenger door window. The window controls will operate
only when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The power window switches will remain active for
up to three minutes after the ignition switch is cycled to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Power Window Switch Panel
1 — Driver Side Front Window Switch
2 — Passenger Side Front Window Switch
3 — Passenger Side Rear Window Switch
4 — Driver Side Rear Window Switch
5— Window Lockout Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down
The window switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push
the window switch for approximately one second, release,
and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up
or down direction and release the switch. To open the
window part way, pull the window switch briefly, and
release the switch when the window is in the desired
position.
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Protection — If
Equipped
Pull the window switch for approximately one second,
release and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window during an Auto-Up operation, push or
pull again the window switch.
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
briefly and release it when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto-
Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again
to close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the Auto-Reverse function unexpectedly during Auto-
Closure. If this happens, pull the switch and hold to
close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Resetting The Auto-Up Feature
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window com-
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down to open the window
completely and continue to hold the switch down for an
additional two seconds after the window is fully open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the
sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The sunroof has two glass panels (the front one is opera-
tional and the rear one fixed) and is equipped with an
electrically operated sun blind.
The power sunroof and the power sun blind can be operated
only with the ignition key turned to the MAR position.
The power sunroof and power sun blind switches are
located in the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Sun Blind Switch
2 — Power Sunroof Switch
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to
children. Occupants, particularly unattended chil-
dren, can become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Opening
Pull the power sunroof switch for approximately one
second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position.
Pull the power sunroof switch a second time for approxi-
mately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully,
then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. To
open the sunroof partway, pull the power sunroof switch
briefly and release it when you want the sunroof to stop.
NOTE: During Express Open operation, any movement of
the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing
With the sunroof in the full open position, pull and hold
the power sunroof switch for approximately one second
and release. The sunroof will close completely, then stop
automatically. This is called “Express Close.” To close the
sunroof partway, pull the power sunroof switch briefly and
release it when you want the sunroof to stop.
NOTE: During Express Close operation, any movement of
the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Anti-Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of the
sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an obstruc-
tion in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this oc-
curs.
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Reinitialization
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode.
2. Push and hold the power sunroof close switch until the
sunroof is completely closed and you hear an audible
click.
3. Push and hold the power sunroof close switch again
within five seconds. Do not release the switch.
4. As the power sunroof close switch is held, the sunroof
panel will open completely and then close again.
5. Once all sunroof motion has stopped, release the power
sunroof close switch.
NOTE: If the switch is released prior to completion of this
procedure, the procedure must be repeated.
6. Confirm that express operation is functional for open
and close operations.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or
partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and
can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Blind
Opening
Pull the sun blind switch for approximately one second
and the sun blind will open completely, then stop auto-
matically. This is called “Express Open.”
To open the sun blind partway, pull the sun blind switch
briefly and release it when you want the sun blind to stop.
With the blind fully open pull the power sun blind switch
and the blind will move towards the front part of the
vehicle, until it is fully closed.
NOTE: During the automatic opening and closing stages,
if the power sun blind switch is pulled again it will stop the
blind movement.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Closing
With the sun blind fully open, pull and hold the power sun
blind switch for approximately one second and release.
The sun blind will close completely, then stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close.”
To close the sun blind partway, pull the sun blind switch
briefly and release it when you want the sun blind to stop.
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, two latches must be released to open the
hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of
the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the red
safety catch lever to the left and raise the hood. The
safety catch lever is located under the center front edge
of the hood.
Closing
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
Safety Catch Lever
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
LIFTGATE
Opening
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or activate the central
locking button located on the instrument panel below the
radio.
To open the liftgate, push the liftgate electronic release and
pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your pas-
sengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. How-
ever, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it
may be necessary to assist the props when opening the
liftgate in cold weather.
Liftgate Electronic Release
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Liftgate Emergency Release
As a security measure, a liftgate emergency release is built
into the liftgate latching mechanism. To access the liftgate
emergency release, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear headrests and fold down the seats
completely.
2. Take the screwdriver from the tool box supplied.
3. With the screwdriver, remove the yellow tab.
4. Press the screwdriver into the seat in order to trigger the
release trunk tab (follow the direction arrow to open).
Cargo Area Features
Rear Cargo Storage Features
This vehicle features a load platform which can be adjusted
to three different heights, permitting modular luggage
compartment volume:
• Position 1 (platform completely lowered) permits maxi-
mum luggage compartment capacity.
Liftgate Emergency Release Yellow Tab Location
Liftgate Emergency Release Tab
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
• Position 2 (platform at threshold level) permits a level
load threshold to facilitate loading/unloading of objects
in the luggage compartment. It also allows the space
underneath to be used as a additional compartment for
stowing objects which are more fragile or small.
• Position 3 (platform completely raised) in conjunction
with the lowering of the rear seat and front passenger
side seat backrests, permits long objects to be loaded. It
is advisable to use this position only for the actual
period in which the objects are transported, then return
the platform to position 1 or 2.
Tilt Of Cargo Floor
The cargo floor can also be arranged at an angle (tilted
toward the rear seat backs), in order to facilitate access to
the area below the luggage compartment. In this position
also the plan guarantees the correct locking of any objects
present inside the cargo area, avoiding that they move in
the event of sudden braking.
CAUTION!
The dimension of the cargo floor permit a maximum
capacity of a distributed weight of 154 lbs (70kg) (if
positioned at threshold level) or 88 lbs (40 kg) (if
positioned at raised level) do not add objects with a
higher weight.
Tilt Floor Feature
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Access To Double Load Compartment
To access the double load compartment, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Grip handle and raise platform, holding it with one
hand.
2. Place the desired objects in compartment.
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
Load Compartment
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
3. Then reposition the platform correctly in the housings
on the side panels and rear crossmember.
NOTE: Movements of the load platform must take place in
a central position relative to the luggage compartment.
Moving The Load Platform
To move the load platform from lower to upper position,
proceed as follows:
1. Grip handle and raise the platform, holding it with one
hand.
Platform Housings
1 — Front Locations
2 — Rear Locations
Load Platform
1 — Handle
2 — Platform
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Position the platform correctly on housing on the side
panels.
Cargo Area Tie Downs
There are two tie downs inside the luggage compartment
for attaching cables which can secure the load carried.
Two additional tie downs located on the rear crossmember.
Raised Position
1 — Front Housing Locations
2 — Rear Housing Locations
Cargo Tie Down Locations
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Cargo hooks are also available on the side panels to fix
loads which are not excessively heavy (e.g. bags).
CAUTION!
The maximum load admitted per each bag hook is
22 lbs (10 kg).
Storage Compartments
There are two storage compartments located on the rear
side panels.
Cargo Side Panel Hook Location
Storage Compartment
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls (hand-held
transmitters) that operate devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security sys-
tems. The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicles bat-
tery.
The HomeLink buttons that are located in the sunvisor
designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink
indicator is located above the center but-
ton.
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal, it is recommended that a new
battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
HomeLink Buttons/Sunvisor
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufac-
tured after 1995:
These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is
attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that
is normally used to open and close the door. The name and
color of the button may vary by manufacturer.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually
be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some
garage door openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the
LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate,
push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete
the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
program while you push and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator
light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then
rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to
rapid.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals
to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission,
which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in
the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door
or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
place the ignition in the RUN position with the engine ON.
Make sure while programming HomeLink with the engine
ON that your vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the
garage door remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button while
you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held trans-
mitter every two seconds until HomeLink has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light
will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30
seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button and
observe the indicator light.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and the garage door/device should acti-
vate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Using HomeLink
To operate, switch the ignition to the ON/RUN position
and the press and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time. If the ignition is switched to the OFF position,
HomeLink will remain active for three minutes. During
this time, if the vehicle is locked, HomeLink is disabled.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes.
NOTE: All channels will be erased. Individual channels
cannot be erased.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the
Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-
held transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to
complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and re-
member to plug it back in?
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call
toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com
for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of
the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open the upper glove compartment, push upward on
the handle release. The glove compartment door will
automatically open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Front Center Armrest Storage — If Equipped
The front center armrest contains a storage compartment.
To open the storage compartment, push in the release latch
on the front of the armrest.
Lift upward on the armrest to gain access to the storage
area.
Glove Compartment Storage
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
Front Center Armrest
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
The front center armrest can also be lifted up and adjusted
in three positions. To adjust the armrest down, pull up on
the armrest, then push the latch down.
Cupholders
For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are located
on the floor console between the front seats.
Armrest Storage Release Latch
Front Cupholders
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
For the rear seat passengers, there is one cupholder located
in the center armrest (if equipped).
Power Outlets
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
The power outlet is located on the instrument panel, below
the climate controls. It only operates with the ignition key
at MAR/ON.
On models with optional ⬙smoker’s kit,⬙ the cigar lighter
takes the place of the power socket. Refer to “Cigar
Lighter” in this section for further information.
NOTE: Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using
unsuitable adaptors.
Rear Cupholder
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped
This is located on the instrument panel, below the climate
controls. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release the
knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically returns
to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To
avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care.
Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off.
NOTE:
• Always check that the cigar lighter is switched off.
• Do not connect devices with power higher than 180 W to
the socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuit-
able adaptors.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load
must not exceed 110 lbs (50 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Their are two attachment points inside the door jambs that
the roof rack crossbars attach to.
Roof Rack Attachment Points
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo inside
the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the ve-
hicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal
injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack cau-
tions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ...................90
▫ Instrument Cluster Descriptions .............90
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ............92
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons ....93
▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System ..........94
▫ Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items........94
䡵 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .........100
▫ Red Warning Lights .....................100
▫ Yellow Warning Lights ...................104
▫ Yellow Indicator Lights ...................108
▫ Green Indicator Lights ...................109
▫ White Indicator Lights ...................110
▫ Blue Indicator Lights ....................111
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .111
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity..........................112
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................112
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
• The instrument cluster display shows messages when
the appropriate conditions exist. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
Instrument Cluster
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
4. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-
cates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-
perature when driving in hot weather or up mountain
grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper
limits of the normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for
service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look
under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And Mainte-
nance.” Follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
5. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
•
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of
a door will activate the display for viewing, and display
the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instru-
ment cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the instru-
ment panel, your instrument cluster display can show you
how systems are working and give you warnings when
they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow
you to scroll through and enter the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu and submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to access
the information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
• OK Button
The OK button may be used for the following:
• Select
• Reset (hold)
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through Menus And Submenus
2 — Arrow Right/Left Access Information/Submenu Screens
3 — OK Button For Selecting And Resetting Information
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Change Engine Oil Indicator System
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indi-
cator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will
flash in the instrument cluster display for approximately
ten seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means
the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition is cycled to the ON or RUN
position. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a
cycle. The menu includes the following functions:
• Speedometer
• Trip
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Vehicle Info
• Tire Pressure
• Service
• Audio
• Phone — If Equipped
• Navigation — If Equipped
• Messages
• Settings
• Display
• Safety & Assistance
• Security
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Speedometer Menu item is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the OK button to change
the speedometer scale from MPH to km/h. Push and hold
the OK to return the speedometer from km/h to MPH.
Trip
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Trip menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
The Trip menu provides the following submenus:
• Trip A
• Trip B
Trip A
Trip A submenu is divided into two pages that contain the
following information.
Page Menu item Description
Trip A First Page Distance Shows the distance traveled during
Trip A.
Travel Time Shows the total travel time for
Trip A.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
Trip A Second Page Average Consumption Shows the average fuel usage during
Trip A.
Average Speed Shows the average speed during
Trip A.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Trip B
Trip B submenu is divided into two pages that contain the
following information.
Page Menu item Description
Trip B First Page Distance Shows the distance traveled during
Trip B.
Travel Time Shows the total travel time for
Trip B.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
Trip B Second Page Average Consumption Shows the average fuel usage during
Trip B.
Average Speed Shows the average speed during
Trip B.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to reset the values on this page.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Vehicle Info menu item is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
The Vehicle Info menu will display the following sub-
menus:
• Tire Pressure
• Service
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure
The Tire Pressure submenu will indicate an under inflated
tire. When a tire goes below the recommended inflation
pressure, the TPMS telltale will illuminate in the cluster,
and the Tire Pressure submenu will appear in the Instru-
ment Cluster Display. A “Tire Low” message will be
present, and the under inflated tire will be highlighted.
To reset the Tire Pressure submenu, push and hold the OK
button on the Steering Wheel. The system will provide
confirmation of the reset. After the reset procedure, if there
are no under inflated tires, the system will display tires at
the correct pressure value.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” under
“Safety” for further information.
Service
The Service submenu will display information about
scheduled maintenance. A pop-up will appear in the
display if service is required.
The following information will display in the pop-up:
• Distance to next service visit
• Days until next service visit
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Audio menu title is displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
The Audio menu item will display information based on
the audio source being listened to.
Phone
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Phone menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. The Phone menu will provide pop-ups during
phone calls.
The Phone menu has the following submenus
• Phone: Displays information on phone connectivity.
Pushing the OK button on the Steering Wheel will enter
the phone submenus.
• Recent Calls: Displays information on the last ten calls
made. The information provided includes the phone
number / phone book name and type of call (incoming,
outgoing, or lost).
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
• Message Reader: Displays text messages received. Push
the OK button on the Steering Wheel to select a message
to read. The system will also display if a message has
been read or not.
• Favorite Numbers: Displays up to ten favorite numbers.
Push the OK button on the Steering Wheel to call a
favorite number.
Navigation — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Navigation menu item is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. The Navigation menu provides “turn by
turn” instructions when using the vehicle’s navigation
function.
The following information is displayed.
• Distance to the next turn
• The name of the street
• An icon representing the next turn
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the left or
right arrow button will allow you to scroll through the
stored messages.
Settings
Push and release the up or down arrow button until the
Settings menu item is displayed in the instrument cluster
display. The Settings menu provides a list of settings that
affect the display and functionality of the instrument
cluster display.
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The settings are as follows:
Setting Menu Item Setting Name Description
Display Backlight Increase or decrease the brightness of the display.
Screen Setup Configure display with the following options:
Zone 1:
• Temperature (Default)
• Time
• Date
• Compass
• None
Zone 2:
• Time (Default)
• Title
• Date
• Compass
• Temperature
• Audio Info
• None
Phone Repetition Turn on or off the display of phone related pop-ups.
Nav. repetition Turn on or off the display of navigation related pop-ups.
Automatic Reset Trip B Reset the Trip B menu item.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Setting Menu Item Setting Name Description
Security Park Assist Volume Increase or decrease Park Assist vol-
ume.
Warning Buzzer Volume Increase or decrease the volume of
the warning buzzer.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instru-
ment panel together with a dedicated message and/or
acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the infor-
mation contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are
advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure indica-
tion. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake functions, in-
cluding brake fluid level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that
there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-
voir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions.
The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to inform of a problem
with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the
problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light
remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will
usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If
the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous
chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is un-
buckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints Systems” in “Safety” for further
information.
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there’s a fault with
the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a
safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15
seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is run-
ning, there may be a malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
— Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a message in the
instrument cluster display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an authorized dealer if the
message remains after restarting the engine.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine
oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact
an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This
light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The
engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light
This light will illuminate if there is a failure of the oil
pressure sensor. If this light illuminates, take it to an
authorized dealer and have them inspect it.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one or more door(s) are
not fully closed.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened, there
will also be a single chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the liftgate is open/
ajar/not fully closed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not function-
ing and service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake
warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position,
have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning
Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It
should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or MAR/
ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
•
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
— Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L)
this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a
part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control sys-
tems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the ignition switch from
OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor
quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start.
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through
several typical driving styles. In most situations, the ve-
hicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
— Passenger Air Bag Indicator Light
This light should come and remain on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned to the
AVV/START or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light stays
on, or comes on while driving it may indicate a problem with
a passenger air bag system, if the light flickers it may indicate
an air bag warning light failure. Have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed
to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recom-
mended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring.
In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption
may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned
above, the display will show the indications corresponding
to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to main-
tain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator to indicate when the system is not operating
properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including
the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to your au-
thorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
Yellow Indicator Lights
— External Light Failure Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator will come on when a
failure to one of the following lights is detected:
• Direction Indicators
• Backup Lights
• Parking Lights
• Daytime Running Lights
• License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
• One or more blown bulbs
• A blown protection fuse
• A break in the electrical connection
— Fuel Cutoff Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred,
and the system has shut the fuel off.
— Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate if there is a fuel cutoff failure. If
this light illuminates, take it to an authorized dealer and
have them inspect it.
— Fuel Level Sensor Failure
This light illuminates when there is a fuel level sensor
failure. If this light illuminates, take it to an authorized
dealer and have them inspect it.
— Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate during an icy road condition.
— Rear Defrost Light
This indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 20 minutes.
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heat-
ing elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the win-
dow.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
— Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature
is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into PARK
and run the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light
turns off.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you
could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with
hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
— Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle security alarm
system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle.
Green Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the speed control
is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or
headlights are turned on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn
signal indicator will flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals
can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved
down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control On Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been turned
on, but a speed is not selected. Refer to “Speed Control” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Cruise Control Cancelled Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when a set cruise control
value has been cancelled by the driver, but cruise control is
still enabled. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Set Speed Warning Light — If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the speed warning
telltale will illuminate in the instrument cluster with a
number matching the set speed. When the set speed is
exceeded, the indication will light up yellow and flash
along with a continuous chime (up to ten seconds or until
the speed is no longer exceeded). Speed Warning can be
turned on and off in the instrument cluster display, for
further information refer to “Instrument Cluster Display
Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel.”
The number “55” is only an example of a speed that can be
set.
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high
beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of
the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunc-
tion lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙
scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating prop-
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to ac-
cess this information to assist with the diagnosis and
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD
II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of
vehicle control could occur that may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including personal
information.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in the
“Multimedia” section.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Main-
tenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready
for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the follow-
ing:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return
to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the igni-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed
to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s
OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the above test routine may then
indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
4
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
SAFETY
CONTENTS
䡵 SAFETY FEATURES ......................116
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............116
▫ Electronic Brake Control System ............117
䡵 AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS .............123
▫ Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ......123
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........127
▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features ........127
▫ Important Safety Precautions ..............128
▫ Seat Belt Systems ......................129
▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........137
▫ Child Restraints .......................151
▫ Transporting Pets ......................167
䡵 SAFETY TIPS ...........................168
▫ Transporting Passengers ..................168
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................168
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ..............................169
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ....................171
5
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most brak-
ing conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel
lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
is working properly each time the vehicle is started and
driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as
ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or
panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short
time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
mitting equipment. This interference can cause pos-
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
of such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase brak-
ing or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
116 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on
when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake sys-
tem will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does
not come on when the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN
mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake
control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System
(TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Dynamic Steering Torque
(DST), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems
work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions and are commonly referred to
as ESC.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-
tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the
rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of
the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure
during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no
longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
SAFETY 117
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions.
• BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-
sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of
wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s)
and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced accel-
eration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake
Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited
slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to
the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off
mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for further information.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short period of time, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the
intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 5% grade or greater hill.
118 SAFETY
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle in NEUTRAL (manual transmission), vehicle
facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is
in REVERSE gear).
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will
not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always
remember the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
Disabling/Enabling HSA
If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Uconnect Settings. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
The DST function uses the integration of the ESC system
with the electric power steering to increase the safety level
of the whole vehicle.
In critical situations (braking with different grip condi-
tions), through the DST function the ESC system controls
the steering to implement an additional torque contribu-
tion on the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct
manoeuvre to the driver.
The coordinated action of brakes and steering increases the
safety and vehicle control feeling.
NOTE: The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the vehicle.
5
SAFETY 119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by apply-
ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to
determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the
actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteract-
ing the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
•
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
ous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-
tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-
teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly
worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
120 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to
have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located
in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when
TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
NOTE:
• The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will
be ON even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially off or
full off.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started, the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
5
SAFETY 121
Partial Off
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank above
the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” button and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal “ESC
On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand,
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by momentarily pushing the “ESC OFF” button.
Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is over-
come, turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the “ESC
OFF” button. This may be done while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by
the ESC system is reduced.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed
of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
ESC Off Switch
122 SAFETY
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are
sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only
intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu-
vers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions,
and driving conditions, influence the chance that
wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve
leaving the roadway or striking objects or other ve-
hicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-
crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour
period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven, this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
5
SAFETY 123
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure
as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the
tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure
on the placard. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire
pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once
the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi
(207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (159 kPa). This tire pressure is suffi-
ciently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In
this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
124 SAFETY
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and
maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or
condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the
tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in
the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem,
transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module.
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
5
SAFETY 125
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate
in the instrument cluster, an acoustic signal will be acti-
vated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire” text
message will display when one or more of the four active
road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should
stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The
system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected, an audible chime will be activated and the
“Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text message
will display. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that
affects radio wave signals.
• Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly.
• The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
• If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition cycle, a chime will sound
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still
turn ON due to the low tire.
126 SAFETY
• However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid.
• This occurs for each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
•
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire,
the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of
the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
5
SAFETY 127
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this section.
It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to
keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child
restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for
further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section
for further information) should be secured in the rear
seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do
not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoul-
der belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room
to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified
to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Cus-
tomer Assistance” section for customer service contact
information.
128 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on
short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and
could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can
reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the
worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the
vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their
seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for
a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passen-
ger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front
seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied.
5
SAFETY 129
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuck-
led (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on
until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants
to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buck-
led again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder
part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock
and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or
being thrown out of the vehicle.
130 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether
or not an air bag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe injury or
death in the event of a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one an-
other in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never
use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
(Continued)
5
SAFETY 131
WARNING! (Continued)
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
132 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust
the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across
your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the
lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen
the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull
on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of
sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5
SAFETY 133
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest
with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and
not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw
any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down
the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor
point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees
to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt
134 SAFETY
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including preg-
nant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident
is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt
across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt
in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the
seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air
bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an Energy
Management feature that may help further reduce the risk
of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has
a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
5
SAFETY 135
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints
Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints”
section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the
locking feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automati-
cally pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove
any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained
in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
136 SAFETY
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could in-
crease the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining the
child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may be
standard equipment on some models, or may be optional
equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring asso-
ciated with the electrical Air Bag System Components.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
5
SAFETY 137
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the
STOP/OFF/LOCK position the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is in the MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunc-
tion in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
138 SAFETY
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection.
Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument
panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag
covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room
to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms
to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
(Continued)
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster
5
SAFETY 139
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the
driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air bags.
140 SAFETY
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protec-
tion by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions,
and also are needed to help keep you in position, away
from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air
bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passen-
ger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of
the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
5
SAFETY 141
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee
Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are
marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys
through the seat seam into the space between the occupant
and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and
with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they
are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the
area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater
risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
142 SAFETY
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
5
SAFETY 143
The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are lo-
cated should remain free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a
particular impact event is appropriate, based on the sever-
ity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the
ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact
events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts,
the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
144 SAFETY
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured
or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side win-
dows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection
from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs
against the seats. Children must be properly re-
strained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags
work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
5
SAFETY 145
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The
rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In
the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover
event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate,
the rollover sensing system will also deploy the seat belt
pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE: The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
146 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after
deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the
air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing,
follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will
not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assem-
blies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately.
Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System
serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
5
SAFETY 147
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether
to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor (If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the
intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
• Engine
• Electric Motor (if equipped)
• Electric power steering
• Brake booster
• Electric park brake
• Automatic transmission gear selector
• Horn
• Front wiper
• Headlamp washer pump
NOTE: After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from
the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical
devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If you have
any doubt, please see an authorized dealer.
148 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is active, a
message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the igni-
tion switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/
ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank
before resetting the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn
signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be
blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system
reset procedure.
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
3. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in
neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal
switch ON.
Right turn light is ON
SOLID.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
5
SAFETY 149
Customer Action Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
10. Turn left turn signal
switch OFF. (Turn Signal
Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/
OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/
ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire
sequence needs to be
completed within one
minute or sequence will
need to be repeated).
System is now reset and
the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF
(Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60
seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset
procedure must be performed again in order to be success-
ful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there to protect
you. Do not modify the components or wiring, in-
cluding adding any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger
side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air
bag system service. If your seat, including your trim
cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
(Continued)
150 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories
may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities, contact an au-
thorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30
seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accel-
erator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In
addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read
the information if they have access to the vehicle or the
EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
5
SAFETY 151
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children
from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an
adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and
warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all
the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a
label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Stan-
dards. You should also make sure that you can install it in
the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/
parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: http://
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
152 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Re-
straint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have outgrown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
5
SAFETY 153
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-
facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is
recommended for children from birth until they reach the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child
seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit
in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can
be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children
should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat
of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and con-
vertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their
rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain
in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the forward-
facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning
booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat
cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
seat belt.
154 SAFETY
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward be-
cause it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the ve-
hicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages,
or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step
test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat
belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the
vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of
the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder be-
tween their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the
child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
5
SAFETY 155
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
156 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether
anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchor-
ages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have
a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
LATCH Label
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 157
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH an-
chorage system once the combined weight is
more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center po-
sition using the inner LATCH lower anchor-
ages?
No Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two
or more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower an-
chorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat
using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard
position.
158 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more in-
formation.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The rear outboard head restraints are remov-
able. If the center rear head restraint requires
removal, see your authorized dealer.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Lower Anchorages
5
SAFETY 159
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat, near the floor.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-
facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether
strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach
to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Upper Tether Anchorages
Tether Anchorage Routing Position
160 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
•
Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not approved
for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments.
You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint.
• Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt,
following the instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what
type of seat belt each seating position has.
1.
Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
3.
Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint
to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in
the straps according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
6.
Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should
not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
5
SAFETY 161
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR)
Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by
other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An
unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind
the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled
seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead
of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat
belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
162 SAFETY
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into
the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under
“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
5
SAFETY 163
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child re-
straint, up to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The rear outboard head restraints are remov-
able. If the center rear head restraint requires
removal, see your authorized dealer.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating po-
sition with an ALR retractor.
164 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position.
For some second row seats, you may need to recline the
seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do
not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing.
If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint while you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
5
SAFETY 165
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the
tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using
the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a
tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling
back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It
should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether
anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
tether anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for
the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your
vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints,
raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and between the
166 SAFETY
two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and
pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the
head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly be-
hind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting
5
SAFETY 167
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even-
tually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling con-
trols to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
168 SAFETY
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or
loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into
the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the ex-
haust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication
or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.
Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or
retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have your authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
5
SAFETY 169
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only
use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of
the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelera-
tor, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake,
or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor mat using the
floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat
upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull
to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasten-
ers on a regular basis.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other
floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor
mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
(Continued)
170 SAFETY
WARNING! (Continued)
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of
vehicle control.
• NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-
installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are
suspected. The cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
5
SAFETY 171
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING THE ENGINE ..................175
▫ Normal Starting ........................175
▫ Cold Weather Operation .................176
▫ Extended Park Starting ...................176
▫ If Engine Fails To Start ..................177
▫ After Starting..........................177
▫ Turbo Charger “Cool Down”...............177
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .177
䡵 PARKING BRAKE .......................178
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............179
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock ................180
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .180
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ..........180
䡵 AUTOSTICK ...........................185
▫ Operation ............................186
䡵 MODE SELECTOR – IF EQUIPPED ...........187
▫ Operating Modes .......................187
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING ..............189
䡵 SPEED CONTROL .......................189
▫ To Activate ...........................190
▫ To Set A Desired Speed...................190
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ................191
▫ To Accelerate For Passing .................192
▫ To Resume Speed .......................192
▫ To Deactivate .........................192
䡵 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED .........193
▫ Rear Park
Assist Sensors ..................193
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts .............193
6
▫ Failure Indications ......................194
▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System ........195
▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions ........195
䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ........197
䡵 ADDING FUEL .........................198
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING .....................200
▫ Certification Label ......................200
䡵 TRAILER TOWING ......................202
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ....................203
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .203
䡵 DRIVING TIPS ..........................204
▫ Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..............204
▫ Driving Through Water ..................204
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children. A child could oper-
ate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
Normal Starting
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) posi-
tion and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails
to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Depress the brake
pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting out
of PARK.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
Cold Weather Operation
To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low
temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking
when the ambient temperature is less than –22°F (–30°C)
and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine
block heater has not been used. An externally powered
electric engine block heater is available as a factory in-
stalled option.
At the time the engine is shut off, the message “Engine
Heater Recommended” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5°F (–15°C).
This acts as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at
the next cold start.
CAUTION!
Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 Synthetic oil and
adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is
important to prevent engine damage and ensure satis-
factory starting in cold conditions.
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
2. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to 15 seconds, cycle
the ignition to the OFF mode, wait five seconds to allow
the starter to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow the
starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the
procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank continu-
ously for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the
vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious
personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
Turbo Charger “Cool Down”
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the
turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the
type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run
for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to
circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation,
it is normal to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After
the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Dealer
Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance”.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console. To
apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, push the front button with your thumb, then lower
the lever completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake Warning
Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a
location accessible to children. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the park-
ing brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an au-
thorized dealer immediately.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally
and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the igni-
tion key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal)
position. The key can only be removed from the ignition
when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once
removed, the transmission is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear
selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN mode (engine running or not), and the brake
pedal (and the lock button on the gear selector) must be
pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To
select a gear range, press the lock button on the gear
selector and move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission
out of PARK. Select the DRIVE range for normal driving.
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are self-
calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and
precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be
sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position) activates AutoStick
mode, providing manual shift control and displaying the
current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc).
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+) while
in the Autostick position will manually select the transmis-
sion gear. Refer to ⬙AutoStick⬙ in this section for further
information.
NOTE: If the gear selector cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move
the gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position)
for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This
is especially important when the engine is cold.
Transmission Gear Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
• Apply the parking brake.
• Shift the transmission into PARK.
• Turn the engine OFF.
• Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exit-
ing the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
(Continued)
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is re-
moved, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove the ignition
key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number
of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the trans-
mission gear selector.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children). A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK
or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
gear selector and firmly move the gear selector all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices
that limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position
provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when
operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in
hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the
AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this section for
further information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the transmission controller will expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to pre-
vent transmission damage due to overheating.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine coolant temperature. Nor-
mal operation will resume once the engine temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Instrument Cluster Messages
Dedicated messages will be displayed in the instrument
cluster to alert the driver when certain unusual conditions
occur.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for ab-
normal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in a fixed gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate.
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-
mission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If
the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service
is required.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature pro-
viding manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and im-
prove overall vehicle performance. This system can also
provide you with more control during passing, city driv-
ing, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, and many
other situations.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick position (beside
the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward.
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-)
triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The
current gear is displayed in the instrument cluster.
NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only shift
up or down when the driver moves the gear selector
rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below.
• The transmission will automatically upshift when nec-
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
• You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third
gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful
in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third gear
after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the gear selector
rearward (+) once or twice.
• If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of
a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged
because the transmission will not shift automatically.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a fault
or overheat condition is detected.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear selector to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick
position at any time without taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
MODE SELECTOR – IF EQUIPPED
This system allows for three selectable modes, according to
driving style and road conditions.
• Normal Mode
• Traction+ Mode
• Gravity Control Function
The mode selector always remains in the center position.
The selected driving mode is indicated by the correspond-
ing LED light on the selector, and an indication in the
display.
Operating Modes
Normal Mode
This mode is aimed at comfort and safety in normal
traction and driving conditions.
Traction+ Mode
This mode is intend to be used on low traction road
surfaces (e.g. snow, ice, mud, etc.).
Mode Selector
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Activation:
Rotate the selector and hold in this position for approxi-
mately half of a second, the corresponding LED will light
up and “Traction+” mode indicator appears on the display
with a dedicated message.
Deactivation:
To ⬙Normal⬙ mode, rotate the mode selector counterclock-
wise and hold in this position for half a second. The LED
corresponding to “Normal” mode will light up and the
“Traction+” mode deactivation indication will appear in
the display.
NOTE: If “Traction+” or “Normal” mode was active when
the engine was stopped, the next time it is started the mode
that was selected will be reactivated.
“Gravity Control” Function
This function allows for a constant vehicle speed to be
maintained while travelling downhill. Noise and vibra-
tions coming from the brakes when the system is activated
are normal. To activate the system reach a speed slower
than 15 mph (25 km/h). After reaching the desired speed,
release the accelerator and brake pedals completely. If you
want to increase/decrease the speed, press the accelerator/
brake pedals again
NOTE: System intervention set-up can only be engaged
with ⬙Traction+⬙ mode activated.
Activation:
With ⬙Traction+⬙ mode on, rotate the selector clockwise and
hold in this position for half a second, until the correspond-
ing LED lights up and “Gravity Control” functionality
appears on the display with a dedicated message.
Deactivation:
To deactivate the ⬙Gravity Control⬙ functionality rotate the
selector counterclockwise and hold in this position for half
a second. The LED corresponding to “Gravity Control”
functionality will shut off and the “Gravity Control” func-
tionality deactivation indication will appear on the display.
NOTE:
• To prevent engine stalling do not use the system if the
transmission is in NEUTRAL.
• The system is available when the speed between 4 mph
(7 km/h) and 15 mph (25 km/h).
• The Gravity Control system must be used with a gear
that is suitable for the set speed, in order to prevent
possible engine stalling. While the Gravity Control sys-
tem is operating it is also possible to take control of the
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle again by pressing the brake and accelerator
pedals. If the Gravity Control is not available when
system intervention set-up is engaged, this could be due
to brake overheating. If this happens, wait for a few
minutes.
• If the braking system overheats the system will deacti-
vate through a gradual release of the braking pressure,
leaving vehicle control to the driver. Deactivation of the
Gravity Control system is accompanied by flashing of
the warning light, by a dedicated message in the display
and an acoustic warning. To reactivate the system inter-
vention set-up wait for the system to cool down and turn
the selector again.
• If the speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and is below
31 mph (50 km/h), the Gravity Control system interven-
tion set-up is deactivated but is ready for being reacti-
vated when the speed drops back below 15 mph
(25 km/h). The indicator in the instrument panel turns
off and the LED on the mode selector stays on. If vehicle
speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h), the Gravity Control
system completely deactivates. To reactivate it, turn the
selector again when the speed is again below 15 mph
(25 km/h).
• On level ground in urban areas it is advised to deacti-
vate the Gravity Control system intervention, since for
speeds below 15 mph (25 km/h) in certain conditions,
such as when, shifting gears or driving over bumps
without using the accelerator pedal, the system might
activate.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
This only operates with the key turned to MAR/ON and
the engine started. The steering allows the force required at
the steering wheel to be adjusted to suit driving conditions.
NOTE: When turning the ignition key quickly, full power
steering functionality can be achieved after a few seconds.
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple
Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control system can be reactivated by
pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the
desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed Control. The
cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button
a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use
is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always leave the system
off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached
the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate
at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before setting the speed.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel 4 — SET (-)/Decel
2 — RES/Resume 5 — CANC/Cancel
3 — On/Off
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ”Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed
increment is dependent on the selected speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by
pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the
Uconnect settings if equipped. Refer to ⬙Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for more information. The speed decre-
ment is dependant on the selected speed unit of U.S. (mph)
or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then the
new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is
normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button and
release. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph
(40 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button,
or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will
deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition switch
OFF erases the set speed from memory.
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The Rear Park Assist system provides an audible indication
of the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking
maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist System Usage Precau-
tions” for the limitations of this system and recommenda-
tions.
Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the
transmission is placed into REVERSE. As the distance from
an obstacle behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert
becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically deactivated
when a trailer is hitched to the vehicle. The system will be
automatically activated as soon as the trailer is removed.
Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 55 inches (140 cm) from the center
of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm) from
the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the
location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist
system indicates the nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds
to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the
underside of the vehicle during the parking maneuver.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission
is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver
that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses
between the tones are directly proportional to the distance
from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous
tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 inches
(30 cm) away.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present
within the sensors’ field of
view
Audible Signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the dis-
tance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information).
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed on the instrument cluster display
(if equipped).
While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not
muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if the distance
increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the distance
measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition
occurs for the external sensors, the signal is turned off after
3 seconds (stopping warnings during maneuvers parallel
to walls).
Failure Indications
A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is
indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the in-
strument panel warning icon and message appearing on
the instrument cluster display.
The warning icon is illuminated and a message
appears on the instrument cluster display. Refer to
⬙Instrument Cluster Display⬙ in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated
immediately if they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor
is in failure condition, the instrument cluster display shall
indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable,
without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even
a single sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled.
The system is turned off automatically.
Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In
washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vapor
jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
Park Assist System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the
rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist system
operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of Rear Park Assist.
• Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The Rear Park Assist system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could pro-
vide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be placed
within 12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper
while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close object as a sensor
problem, causing a failure indication to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using Rear Park Assist. Always check carefully be-
hind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, and blind spots before backing up. You
are responsible for safety and must continue to pay
attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
• Before using Rear Park Assist, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly
is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the
hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the con-
tinuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size
and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle
is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small
obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected when they
are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear
Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear
Park Assist.
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly mounted for a long period, it is possible to filter
out the ball mount and hitch ball assembly presence in
sensor field of view. The filtering operation must be
performed only by an authorized dealer.
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear
license plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay feature
and it is turned on, the rear camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the
vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
backup path based on the steering wheel position. A
dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image
to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, or blind spots before backing up. You are re-
sponsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
ADDING FUEL
1. Open the fuel filler door.
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the pipe
seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refuel-
ing.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle “clicks”
or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the tool bag or
cargo floor area in the rear cargo area) to open the flapper
door to allow for emergency refueling with a gas can.
Funnel Location Inside Of Tool Kit
Funnel Location For Vehicle With Optional Spare Tire
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
turn on.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Emergency Fuel Filling Procedure
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must
be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The
weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be
determined separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the
vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear
axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to
rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down
low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow
all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts
on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way
your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose
control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow appli-
cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provin-
cial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer
provided all four wheels are OFF the ground.
This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the
front wheels OFF the ground).
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Information in this section will aid in safe controlled
launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and care-
fully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first be-
come visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and pre-
vent damage to your vehicle.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Further-
more, flowing and/or rising water can carry your ve-
hicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shal-
low standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping dis-
tances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju-
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
(Continued)
6
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always in-
spect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ............208
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT ....................208
▫ Replacement Bulbs .....................208
▫ Replacing Exterior Bulbs ..................210
䡵 FUSES ................................213
▫ General Information .....................214
▫ Underhood Fuses .......................214
▫ Interior Fuses..........................216
▫ Rear Interior Fuses ......................219
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................220
▫ Jack Location .........................221
▫ Spare Tire Removal/Stowage ..............221
▫ Preparations For Jacking .................222
▫ Jacking Instructions .....................223
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT .......................227
䡵 JUMP STARTING ........................230
▫ Preparations For Jump Start ...............230
▫ Jump Starting Procedure ..................231
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .............233
䡵 IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE ........234
䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ..............236
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............237
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ............238
䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ...............................239
䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ............239
7
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Overhead Lamp C5W
Sun Visors C5W
Courtesy Lamp W5W
Glove Compartment C5W
Rear Courtesy Lamp C5W
208 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp HIR2LL
Front Turn Signal Lamps WY21W
Front Parking LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Daytime Running Lamps W21W
Front Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps P21/5W
Rear Tail Lamp LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Rear Turn Signal Lamps P21W
Rear Backup Lamps W16W
Rear Side Marker Lamps LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp LED (See Authorized Dealer)
Front Fog Lamps H11
Rear Fog Lamps - If Equipped W16W
License Plate Lamps W5W
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 209
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps Low Beam And High Beam
1. Remove the plastic sealing cap from the back of the
headlamp housing by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bulb when all the tabs are aligned with the
openings in the metal holder.
Headlamp Sealing Cap Removal
Bulb Removal Procedure
210 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb. 5. Install the new bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in
place.
Electrical Connector Removal
New Bulb Installation
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 211
6. Reinstall the plastic cap.
Front Turn Signal And Daytime Running Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access upper cover in
wheel liner.
2. Open the upper cover on the front of the wheel liner.
3. Remove the cap from the back of the lower headlamp
housing.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and remove.
5. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
6. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover on the wheel
liner.
Front Fog Lamps
To replace the front fog lights, see an authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps
The front/rear side marker lamps are LED and not ser-
viced separately. See an authorized dealer for replacement
of these lights.
Headlamp Sealing Cap Installation
212 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the tail lamp access panel.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the tail lamp to the
body of the vehicle.
4. Remove the tail lamp assembly.
5. Remove the two screws that secure the backplate to the
tail lamp housing.
6. Separate the backplate from the tail lamp housing.
7. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing
them slightly and turning counterclockwise.
8. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out.
9. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
This light is an LED assembly. See an authorized dealer for
replacement.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice
versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is
off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 213
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Underhood Fuses
The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of
the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the
fuses, push the release tabs and remove the cover.
The ID number of the electrical component corresponding
to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover.
Blade Fuses
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element.
3—
Blade fuse with a NOT functional / BAD fuse element (blown fuse).
Front Distribution Unit
214 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – Body Controller
F02 60 Amp Blue – Body Controller Rear Distribution Unit
F03 20 Amp Yellow – Ignition Switch
F04 40 Amp Orange – Anti-Lock Brake Pump
F05 70 Amp Tan – Electric Power Steering
F06 30 Amp Green – Radiator Fan - Low Speed
F07 50 Amp Red – Radiator Fan - High Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Blower Motor
F09 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission (Aisin)
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F11 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F15 – 10 Amp Red Transmission (Aisin)
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown Transmission Powertrain
F17 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain
F18 – 5 Amp Tan Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioning
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Powertrain
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Anti-Lock Brake Valves
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 215
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F30 – 5 Amp Tan After Run Pump
F81 70 Amp Tan – PTC (Secondary)
F83 40 Amp Orange – PTC (Primary)
F85 – 15 Amp Blue Front Power Outlet 12V
F86 – 7.5 Amp Brown USB Charger Sockets
F88 – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Mirrors
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module
(BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the
instrument panel.
Interior Fuse Panel
216 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber
Mini Fuse Description
1 F12 7.5 Amp Brown Right Low Beam
2 F32 7.5 Amp Brown Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy
Lights
Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 217
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber
Mini Fuse Description
3 F53 7.5 Amp Brown Instrument Panel Node
4 F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Door Locking
5 F36 15 Amp Blue Diagnostic Socket, Vehicle Radio, Climate Control Sys-
tem, TPMS, Sunroof
6 F90 7.5 Amp Brown Left High Beam
7 F91 7.5 Amp Brown Right High Beam
8 F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Light
9 F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Light
10 F42 5 Amp Tan BSM, ESP
11 F33 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Passenger Window
12 F34 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Passenger Window
13 F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer
14 F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
15 F13 7.5 Amp Brown Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling
16 F50 7.5 Amp Brown Airbag
17 F51 5 Amp Tan
Vehicle Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop Light,
Reverse Gear, Sunroof, Parking Sensor, Rear Camera
18 F37 7.5 Amp Brown Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node
19 F49 5 Amp Tan Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor
218 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber
Mini Fuse Description
20 F31 5 Amp Tan Climate Control, Seat Regulation
21 F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
Rear Interior Fuses
The rear interior fuse panel is located on the driver’s side in
the rear compartment.
Rear Fuse Panel
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 219
Cavity
Vehicle Fuse Num-
ber
Mini Fuse Description
1 F61 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Regulation Seats
2 F62 15 Amp Blue Heated Seats
3 F64 20 Amp Yellow Hi Fi System
4 F65 20 Amp Yellow Sun Blind
5 F66 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
220 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Location
The spare tire jack is located in the rear cargo area
underneath the cargo floor.
Spare Tire Removal/Stowage
The spare tire is stowed in underneath the rear cargo area
on the outside of the vehicle.
1. Remove the cargo floor to access the winch.
2. Remove the jack handle and use the wrench end to
lower the spare tire.
Jack Location
1 — Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Jack
3 — Jack Handle
4 — Emergency Allen Key
5 — Emergency Spare Tire Bag
6 — Emergency Screwdriver
Spare Tire Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 221
3. When the spare is clear, replace the jack tools.
Spare Tire Stowage
Rotate the jack wrench tool on the winch drive nut
clockwise (the flat tire must not be connected to the winch)
until effort becomes heavy and an audible click is heard
indicating the winch is properly stowed.
Cover the flat tire with the Emergency Spare Tire Bag and
stow the flat tire into the trunk.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air wrench or
power tool may damage the winch.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
Winch Location
222 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6.
Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge
of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmis-
sion in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely
stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem
facing the ground.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 223
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and wheel bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center cap
covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench to pry
the center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the wheel
with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise
one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
Front Jacking Location
224 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point
symbols on the sill molding).
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle between the locating notches
on the sill flange.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire and
install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in “Ser-
vicing And Maintenance” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its use,
and operation.
Rear Jacking Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 225
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel
bolts.
WARNING!
• To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel bolts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for proper lug nut torque. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
226 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TIRE SERVICE KIT
If a tire is punctured, you can make a first emergency repair
using the Tire Service Kit located in the rear storage area
under the cargo floor.
Tire punctures of up to 1/4 of an inch (6mm) can be
repaired; the kit can be used in all weather conditions. Do
not remove the foreign object from the punctured tire, i.e.,
screw or nail.
Remove the Tire Service Kit from the vehicle, take it out
from the bag and place it near the punctured tire. Screw the
clear flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under
the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
–
If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the
wheel.
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Components
1 — Power Plug (located on bottom side of Tire Service Kit)
2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3 — Power Button
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Sealant Bottle
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 227
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit
to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire
Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty
of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physi-
cian immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately
with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do
not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-
ately.
Insert the power plug into the vehicle power outlet socket.
Start the vehicle engine.
Push the Tire Service Kit power button to the “I” position.
The electric compressor will be turned on, sealant and air
will inflate the tire.
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure should be reached
within 20 minutes. If the pressure has not been reached,
turn off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehicle
30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to better distribute the
sealant inside the tire.
Attach the clear flexible sealant hose of the compressor
directly to the tire valve and repeat the inflation process.
When the correct pressure has been reached, start driving
the vehicle to uniformly distribute the sealant inside the
tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check the tire pressure. If
the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the
vehicle, as the tire is too damaged, contact the nearest
authorized dealer.
228 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have
the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have
the tire checked as soon as possible at an authorized
dealer.
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above, repeat the
inflation process to reach the correct tire pressure and
continue driving.
Peel off the warning label from the bottle and place it on
the dashboard as a reminder to the driver that the tire has
been treated with the Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get hot
after use, so it should be handled carefully.
NOTE: Replace the sealant canister prior to the expiration
date at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Store the sealant canister in its special compartment,
away from sources of heat. Failure to follow this
WARNING may result in sealant canister rupture and
serious injury or death.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 229
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another
vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump
starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alter-
nator or electrical system may occur.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located on the driver’s side of
the engine compartment.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
(Continued)
Positive Battery Post
230 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
WARNING! (Continued)
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, place the transmission in
PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, pull upward on
the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could
establish a ground connection and personal injury
could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Before connecting the jumper cables to the dis-
charged battery, the negative (-) battery cable must be
disconnected from the discharged battery. This is the only
way to successfully jump start the vehicle.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 231
Follow these steps to disconnect the negative (-) battery
cable:
1. Pull outward on the negative (-) battery cable terminal
release lever to the open position.
2. Lift up on the negative (-) battery cable terminal and set
aside.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the negative (-) battery cable terminal of the
discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the nega-
tive (-) battery cable terminal of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) jumper cable from the posi-
tive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
232 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE: The negative (-) battery cable must be connected to
the negative (-) post of the battery.
Follow these steps to connect the negative (-) battery cable:
1. Connect the negative (-) battery terminal to the negative
(-) post of the battery.
2. Push inward on the negative (-) battery cable terminal
release lever to the closed position.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle,
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to
high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement
to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 233
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the
instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn
off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
IGNITION KEY REMOVAL OVERRIDE
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key
removal) position. To remove the key manually, proceed as
follows:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the Allen Key located in the rear cargo area, in
the tool bag (if equipped) or on the left side in the cargo
box.
3. Unlock the steering column, pull the tilt/telescoping
control handle down.
4. Pull the steering wheel outward until it is in the end of
the travel position, then lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle up until fully engaged.
5. Using the Allen key, undo the lower steering column
cover screws, and remove the lower cover.
234 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Pull the release tab downwards using one hand and
with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards.
7. Once the key is removed, reinstall the steering column
cover.
CAUTION!
It is advisable to contact an authorized dealer to have
the reinstall procedure carried out. If you would like to
proceed in performing the reinstall procedure special
attention must be paid to the correct coupling of the
clips. Otherwise damage to the cover or noise might be
heard due to incorrect fastening of the lower cover.
Lower Steering Column Screw Locations Release Tab Location
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 235
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. By pulling the gear selector boot, carefully separate the
gear selector bezel and boot assembly from the center
console, and raise it up to access the gear selector
mechanism.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert the equipped screwdriver or similar tool into the
gear selector override access hole (at the right front
corner of the gear selector assembly) and push and hold
the override release lever down.
NOTE: When inserting the screwdriver, keep it as vertical
as possible during the override operation.
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
Gear Selector Override
1 — Raised Gear Selector Boot
2 — Gear Selector Override Access Hole
236 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE,
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount
of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the engine.
NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before
rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to
restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seconds continuously without stopping when you are
stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead
to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five rocking-
motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure during pro-
longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It
can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 237
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is man-
datory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or
associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Dam-
age to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
238 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position.
• Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated.
• Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off
the ground).
If the ignition key is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in
order to move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
ments can cause severe transmission damage. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed under certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety”
for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SCHEDULED SERVICING .................243
▫ Maintenance Plan.......................244
▫ Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ............246
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO .....247
▫ Checking Oil Level .....................247
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ...................248
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery .................248
䡵 DEALER SERVICE .......................249
▫ Engine Oil ...........................249
▫ Engine Oil Filter .......................251
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter .................251
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance ..............252
▫ Body Lubrication ......................253
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades .................253
▫ Exhaust System ........................256
▫ Cooling System ........................257
▫ Brake System .........................261
▫ Automatic Transmission ..................263
䡵 RAISING THE VEHICLE ..................264
䡵 TIRES ................................264
▫ Tire Safety Information ..................264
▫ Tires — General Information ..............272
▫ Tire Types ............................278
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped ................279
▫ Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ..............282
▫ Tire Chains (Traction Devices) .............283
▫ Tir
e Rotation Recommendations ............284
8
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ..................285
▫ Treadwear ............................285
▫ Traction Grades ........................285
▫ Temperature Grades .....................285
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE .....................286
䡵 BODYWORK ...........................287
▫ Protection From Atmospheric Agents ........287
▫ Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........287
▫ Preserving The Bodywork .................288
䡵 INTERIORS ............................289
▫ Seats And Fabric Parts ...................289
▫ Plastic And Coated Parts..................289
▫ Leather Parts ..........................290
▫ Glass Surfaces .........................290
242 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate in the instrument cluster.
This means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer
tow and extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe operating conditions
can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring
to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months, or 350
hours of engine run time: whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and
off-road environment, or is operated predominately at idle
or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake
master cylinder reservoir, and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 243
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for
the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
• Check and adjust hand brake.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals, and replace
if necessary.
XXXXXXX
244 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (which-
ever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
XXXXXXX
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace brake fluid every two
years. *
XXXXXXX
Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs. ** X X X X X
Flush and replace the engine cool-
ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
X
Replace the timing belt. X
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 245
* The brake fluid change interval is time based only,
mileage intervals do not apply.
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle
could result in a component malfunction and effect
vehicle handling and performance. This could cause
an accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or 350 hours of
engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
246 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be
maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes
after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil
level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give
you an incorrect reading.
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Oil Fill Cap
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 247
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and
approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is
shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the
dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone.
Adding 1 quart (1 Liter) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at
the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the
engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead
to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil tempera-
ture. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil tem-
perature could damage your engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked
at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to
“Engine Compartment” in this section for further informa-
tion.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around the
washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainte-
nance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump Starting
Procedure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster
(Continued)
248 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before
connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service opera-
tions in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available
which include detailed service information for your ve-
hicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any
procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for further information.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 249
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or 350
hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350
hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern
for fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for turbo-
charged engines under all types of operating conditions,
the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-12991.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Pe-
troleum Institute (API). The manu-
facturer only recommends API Cer-
tified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20,
0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 1.4L Turbo Engine
(SAE Grade)
Mopar SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel
economy.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certifi-
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
ment” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further infor-
mation.
250 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil
certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the
engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station
or governmental agency for advice on how and where used
oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type dispos-
able oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters
and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 251
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the ve-
hicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
assure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner
filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants ap-
proved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning
system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you. Other unap-
proved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the sys-
tem to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located in your owner’s
information kit, for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant un-
der high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or
damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condition-
ing components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
252 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
Mopar Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the applica-
tion of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped
clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular attention should
also be given to hood latching components to ensure
proper function. When performing other underhood ser-
vices, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer
fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a
dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 253
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the follow-
ing points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
Service Position Strategy
The service position allows the wiper blades to be placed in
a position that allows the wiper blades to be easily
changed.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the wipers must be
in the Park position before placing the ignition in the
STOP/OFF position.
Service mode must be activated within two minutes after
the ignition is placed in the STOP/OFF position.
To have a correct activation of strategy, the Service Position
command (antipanic) must be active for at least half a
second.
At every valid activation of Service Position command, the
wiper blades are activated for 250 ms.
The Service Position command can be repeated several
times to bring the blades into the desired position, up to a
maximum of three times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy is disabled.
Function Deactivation:
The functionality is reset if:
• The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN position.
• Number of subsequent activations is three.
• Two minutes timer has expired after turning the ignition
OFF.
NOTE: When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go
into the parking position.
254 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the windshield.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the wiper blade.
3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the wiper blade
until it snaps into place.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade
off of the liftgate glass.
2. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward
to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade
holder.
1—WiperBlade
2 — Release Button
3—WiperArm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Blade Pivot Pin
3—WiperArm
4 — Wiper Blade Holder
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 255
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly push the
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the
vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or
if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an
authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could
permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compart-
ment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace
as required.
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breath-
ing it can make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety
Tips” in “Safety” for further information.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
256 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control sys-
tems can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and
abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in
gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the
OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 257
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where appli-
cable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the
front of the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to
be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions” for further information.
NOTE:
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally
compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibi-
tors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with propyl-
ene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of
propylene glycolbased engine coolant (antifreeze) is not
recommended.
258 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows
extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (anti-
freeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you use
the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for
assistance.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant prop-
erly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to
severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 259
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as pos-
sible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
expansion bottle/recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regu-
lated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open contain-
ers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If
ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate.
With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
260 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain
the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.
Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally
a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity
accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when
the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion pro-
tection of your engine which contains aluminum com-
ponents.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically. Refer
to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 261
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possi-
bly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding
on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible
brake damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked when
performing under hood services or immediately if the
“Brake Warning Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid
level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to
fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information. Using the
wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your
brake system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed hydraulic
master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from the air
resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it
to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged brak-
ing, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
262 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer
to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the
transmission fluid at the correct level using the recom-
mended fluid.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufactur-
er’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives
to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 263
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required; therefore the transmis-
sion has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an
authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an im-
proper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contami-
nated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disas-
sembled for any reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the vehicle, go to
an authorized dealer or service station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire
Loading.
264 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the
size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare
tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction
and Temperature Grades
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 265
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with
white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date
code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as
mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the
outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of
the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
–
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards
and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
–
01 means the year 2001
–
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the
tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
266 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located be-
hind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. In-
flation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch)
or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is
molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s
loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressures.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 267
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
268 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare
tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information
placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operat-
ing” section of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 269
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
270 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the rec-
ommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never over-
load them.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 271
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
272 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with tem-
perature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 273
pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading
may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use
radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them
with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets
the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofaninch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immedi-
ately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service
description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
274 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more informa-
tion.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be re-
placed.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 275
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire
tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread
life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread
life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled
maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Tire Tread
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
276 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with
oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent
to the originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread
Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification
Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index
and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety
Information” section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to steer-
ing, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can
cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering
and suspension components. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 277
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having ad-
equate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall, and Winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry condi-
tions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice.
If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware
these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when am-
bient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are
covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
278 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit stud-
ded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before
using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 279
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18
103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collaps-
ible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the
electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare
tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original equip-
ment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Instal-
lation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle
control.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome
plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral
Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recom-
mended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always
wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt,
sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride,
etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap
to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a
stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating
that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent dam-
age to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
chrome wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equiva-
lent is recommended.
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This activ-
ity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or
polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY US-
ING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clear-
ance. Follow these recommendations to guard against
damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Front Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, on a 205/55 R16, use reduced
size snow chains or traction devices with a maximum
projection of 9 mm beyond the tire profile.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The
benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggres-
sive tread designs such as those on all season type tires.
Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud,
snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth,
quiet ride.
Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper mainte-
nance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear
should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manu-
facturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the
tires on your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop
on wet pavement, as measured under controlled condi-
tions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days,
you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor dam-
age when the system is started again.
NOTE: When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic
locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in
snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal
in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle
to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle
is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resis-
tance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage
than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated
on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and Tar
Remover to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar Cleaner
Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your
paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that
may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8,274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost
of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the
owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun
damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather
upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not required to
maintain the original condition.
NOTE: If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer
more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy
cleaning, and FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Ketone
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with
Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type
glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use
caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CONTENTS
䡵 IDENTIFICATION DATA...................292
▫ Vehicle Identification Number .............292
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM ........................292
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .293
▫ Torque Specifications ....................293
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...................294
▫ 1.4L Turbo ...........................294
▫ Reformulated Gasoline ..................295
▫ Materials Added To Fuel .................295
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ...............295
▫ Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . .296
▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ......296
▫ MMT In Gasoline .......................296
▫ Fuel System Cautions ....................297
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ...............297
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES ......................298
䡵 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................298
▫ Engine ..............................298
▫ Chassis .............................300
9
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the
right front floor pan under the passenger seat, on an
adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the
B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title.
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake sys-
tems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal
capability, the remaining system will still function. How-
ever, there will be some loss of overall braking effective-
ness. You may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
potential activation of the Brake Warning Light.
Vehicle Identification Number
Stamped VIN Location
292 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes
will still function. However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required with the
power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the
lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
63 Ft-Lbs
(86 N·m) Steel
Wheels Only
89 Ft-Lbs
(120 N·m) Alu-
minum Wheels
Only
M12 x 1.25 17 mm
**Use only an authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that the socket is
fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half-
way).
Wheel Mounting Surface
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 293
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against
the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been
lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Turbo
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations, provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality unleaded “Regular”
gasoline having a posted octane number
of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2
method. For optimum performance and
fuel economy the use of “Premium” 91 octane gasoline or
higher is recommended.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87,
hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a
cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making
a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause
engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
Torque Patterns
294 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifi-
cally blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved
performance and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of detergents
to further aide in minimizing engine
and fuel system deposits. When avail-
able, the usage of TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a
list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be
avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and dia-
phragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygen-
ates such as ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15%
ethanol (E-15).
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 295
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed
natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are
not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is
a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended
into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended
with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gaso-
line blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles.
The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without
MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
296 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of metha-
nol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or
additives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mon-
oxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 297
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 12.7 Gallons 48.1 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
Cooling System
1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/
150,000 Mile Formula).
6.1 Quarts 5.8 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-
nology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-90032.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
298 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil Filter – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15%
Ethanol.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine dam-
age and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is differ-
ent and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (anti-
freeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
freeze) is not recommended.
9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 299
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed every
24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage inter-
vals do not apply.
300 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CONTENTS
䡵 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ...................302
䡵 DRAG & DROP MENU BAR ................302
䡵 CYBERSECURITY ........................303
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS ...................304
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4/4
NAV With 7–inch Display Settings ...........304
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS .......315
▫ Radio Operation........................315
▫ Player Operation .......................315
䡵 IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL .......316
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . . .317
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information ..........317
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ...........................318
▫ Introducing Uconnect ....................318
▫ Get Started ...........................318
▫ Basic Voice Commands ...................319
▫ Radio ...............................320
▫ Media ...............................320
▫ Phone ...............................321
▫ Navigation (4 NAV) .....................322
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ..............323
▫ Android Auto — If Equipped ..............323
▫ Apple CarPlay — If Equipped ..............324
▫ General Information .....................325
▫ Additional Information ...................325
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ............326
10
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
NOTE: Uconnect screen images are for illustration pur-
poses only and may not reflect exact software for your
vehicle.
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
these steps:
1. Press the “Uconnect
” button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an
existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the
main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Main Menu
302 MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive informa-
tion. This information allows systems and features in your
vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security fea-
tures to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates
and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a com-
puter or other devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired
or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious
software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behav-
ior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
10
MULTIMEDIA 303
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly
regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept infor-
mation and private communications without your consent.
For further information, refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 4/4
NAV With 7–inch Display Settings
Press the Settings button to display the menu setting screen. In
this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access program-
mable features that may be equipped such as Language,
Display, Units, Voice, Clock & Date, Safety/ Driving Assis-
tance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings to Default and Clear
Personal Data.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may
vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen
to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press
and release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
304 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the “Language” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the
radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on.
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
+–
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
+–
AutoShow Smartphone Display
Upon Connection
On Off
10
MULTIMEDIA 305
Setting Name Selectable Options
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
Units
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the instru-
ment cluster display, odometer, and navigation system
changed between US and Metric units of measure. Press
“US,” “Metric” or “Custom.”
• Custom
When “Custom” is selected, you may select each unit of
measure independently displayed in the instrument cluster
display, and navigation system.
Setting Name Selectable Options
US Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Metric Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Custom Distance Fuel Consumption Pressure Temperature
Voice
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
306 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to automatically have the radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press the “Sync
Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen.
Set Time Hours +–
NOTE:
This feature allows you to adjust the hours. The “Sync Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen must be un-
checked.
Set Time Minutes +–
NOTE:
This feature allows you to adjust the minutes. The “Sync Time with Nav” button on the touchscreen must be un-
checked.
Time Format 12hrs 24hrs
AM PM
10
MULTIMEDIA 307
Setting Name Selectable Options
Show Time In Status Bar — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.
Set Date (MM/DD/YY) -+
NOTE:
This feature allows you to set the date, month, and year using the plus and minus buttons.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Rear View Camera Delay On Off
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
NOTE:
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in
REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h).
Rear ParkSense Chime
Volume — If Equipped
Low Med High
308 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lights +–
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the brightness of the interior ambient lighting.
Greeting Lights -+
Daytime Running
Lights
On Off
Cornering Lights On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on,
a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
10
MULTIMEDIA 309
Doors & Locks
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE: When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h).
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 MIN 20 MIN
310 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
Equalizer +–
NOTE: When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.
AUX Volume Offset On Off
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through
the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE: USB devices will automatically play media when AutoPlay is turned On.
Auto-On Radio On Off Recall Last
NOTE: The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition
off.
10
MULTIMEDIA 311
Phone
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws.
Your attention should be focused on safely operating
the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
After pressing the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, the
following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
NOTE: The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text or both, to any in-
coming call, or text, before sending it directly to voicemail. It also allows a choice between a Default or Custom auto
reply message. In the Customize Auto Reply Message, a customized message can be typed. It also keeps a counter of
all missed calls and texts while on the road.
Paired Phones and Audio Devices Currently Paired Phones and Audio Devices
312 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE: The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music chan-
nel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset
is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except
that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touch-
screen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your
radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription
Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the
screen or visit the provider online.
10
MULTIMEDIA 313
Restore Settings To Default
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touch-
screen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will reset Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default.
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on
the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE: When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets.
314 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located at the rear of
the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the
switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to select/
enter an item while scrolling through menu.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push-
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
“Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
Player Operation
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track
on the Player. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will
go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning
of the previous track if it is within one second after the
current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
10
MULTIMEDIA 315
IPOD/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL
This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be
plugged into the AUX Jack or USB port.
Rear Seat Charge Only USB
There is also a Rear Seat USB port located on the back of the
center console that can be used to charge USB devices.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
iPod and external USB support capability.
AUX Jack And USB Port
1 — AUX/Audio Jack
2 — USB Port
Rear Seat USB
316 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the an-
tenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation when not
using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommen-
dations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific com-
munity.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio
is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is
far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wire-
less devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or
environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure
of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization
before turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
10
MULTIMEDIA 317
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-
ates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-
tions, may cause harmful interference to radio commu-
nications. However, there is no guarantee that interfer-
ence will not occur in a particular installation.
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
1. Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
2. Consult an authorized dealer or an experienced radio
technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your Uconnect 4/4 NAV
system.
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps
menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4 NAV
system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4 system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-
structions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conver-
sations are examples of noise that may impact recogni-
tion.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing
straight ahead.
318 MULTIMEDIA
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Cancel” to stop a current voice session
• “ Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• “ Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — Push To Say Vocal Commands
3 — Push To End Call
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Basic Voice Commands
10
MULTIMEDIA 319
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touch-
screen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-
tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “ Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “ Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want
to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say
“ Help.” The system provides you with a list of com-
mands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxil-
iary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available
for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
• “ Change source to Bluetooth”
• “ Change source to AUX”
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Radio
320 MULTIMEDIA
• “ Change source to USB”
• “ Play artist Beethoven”; “ Play album Greatest Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “ Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your USB device. Your Voice Command
must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the VR Button
. After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
• “ Call John Smith”
• “ Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”
• “ Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
• “ Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Media
10
MULTIMEDIA 321
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
button
and say “ Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “ Call
John Smith work.”
Navigation (4 NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the
beep, say, “ Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
. After
the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
Uconnect 4/4 NAV Phone
Uconnect 4 NAV Navigation
322 MULTIMEDIA
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select
media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language and interacts with requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on
the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
Press the
button on the steering wheel to activate Siri.
As soon as your hear a double beep, you can start
interacting with Siri to listen to music, get directions,
read text messages and more.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto features
may or may not be available in every region and/or
language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to interact with
Android’s best-in-class speech technology through your
vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your Android powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto icon
that replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone” icon
within Android Auto, to activate Android’s VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
• Maps
• Music
Siri Eyes Free Available
10
MULTIMEDIA 323
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android, Android Auto, and Google Play are
trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE: Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple CarPlay and
Android Auto features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to interact
with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system,
and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your
iPhone and a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided Lightning
cable, and press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple
CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Home” button within Apple
CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Android Auto
324 MULTIMEDIA
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE: Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for phone
compatibility. Data plan rates apply. Vehicle user interface
is a product of Apple®. Apple CarPlay is a trademark of
Apple Inc. iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple terms of use and
privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
Apple CarPlay
10
MULTIMEDIA 325
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-
855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800-
465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching
the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating
removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc), oversized, or
have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before
considering disc player service.
326 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ........................328
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ..............328
▫ Prepare A List .........................328
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests ..............328
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................328
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center .............329
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........329
▫ In Mexico Contact ......................329
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands..........329
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) ....................330
▫ Service Contract .......................330
䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION ...............331
䡵 MOPARPARTS .........................331
䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS .............331
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .331
▫ In Canada ............................332
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .............332
11
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work
to be performed may not be covered by the warranty.
Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep
a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This
can often provide a clue to the current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We
strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an autho-
rized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality service.
The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest
information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
328 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center
should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (888) 242-6342
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (888) 242-6342
Fax: (787) 782-3345
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 329
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunica-
tion Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by
dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by
Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell
Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to
help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs
after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manu-
facturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufac-
turer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any
questions about the service contract, call the manufactur-
er’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-
521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service con-
tract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not
responsible for any service contract other than the manu-
facturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and
you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
330 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of component
wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this
vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are avail-
able from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at
its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying
FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
11
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 331
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Master-
card, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and fea-
tures. They show exactly how to find and correct problems
the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and driv-
ability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete
list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance proce-
dures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com (U.S.)
332 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
12
About Your Brakes .........................292
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .............259
Adding Fuel ..............................198
Adding Washing Fluid.......................248
Additives, Fuel ............................295
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ........................141
Air Bag Warning Light .....................138
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................142
Enhanced Accident Response .............148, 239
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................239
If Deployment Occurs .....................147
Knee Impact Bolsters ......................141
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .............150
Maintenance ............................150
Side Air Bags ...........................142
Transporting Pets ........................167
Air Bag Light.......................100, 138, 169
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)......251
Air Conditioner Maintenance ..................252
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ................252, 253
Air Conditioner System ......................252
Air Conditioning Filter .......................62
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ................61
Air Filter ................................251
Air Pressure
Tires..................................273
Alarm
Security Alarm........................21, 103
Alarm System
Security Alarm ...........................21
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ................5
Android Auto .............................323
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................258, 298
Disposal ...............................260
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................116
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................104, 108
Apple CarPlay ............................324
Arming System
Security Alarm ...........................2
1
Audio Systems (Radio).......................302
Automatic Dimming Mirror ....................38
Automatic Transmission ..................179, 180
Adding Fluid ...........................264
Autostick ..............................185
Fluid And Filter Change ...................264
Fluid Change ...........................264
Fluid Level Check .....................263, 264
Fluid Type ..........................263, 300
Special Additives .........................263
334 INDEX
Autostick ................................185
Auto Up Power Windows .....................64
Battery...............................103, 248
Charging System Light ....................103
Belts, Seat ................................169
Body Mechanism Lubrication ..................253
B-Pillar Location ...........................268
Brake Assist System .........................117
Brake Fluid ...............................300
Brake System ..........................261, 292
Anti-Lock (ABS) .........................292
Fluid Check ............................262
Master Cylinder .........................262
Parking ...............................178
Warning Light ...........................101
Brake/Transmission Interlock ..................180
Bulb Replacement ..........................208
Bulbs, Light ...........................171, 208
Camera, Rear .............................197
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...........298
Capacities, Fluid ...........................298
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ............................250
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .................260
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................168, 297
Cargo Area Cover ...........................71
Cargo Compartment .........................71
Car Washes...............................288
Cellular Phone ............................317
Center High Mounted Stop Light ...............213
Certification Label ..........................200
Chains, Tire ..............................283
Changing A Flat Tire .....................220, 264
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light)....112
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ...............168
Checks, Safety.............................168
Child Restraint ............................151
Child Restraints
Booster
Seats ............................155
Child Seat Installation .....................165
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ........162
Infant And Child Restraints .................154
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......157
Older Children And Child Restraints ...........154
Seating Positions .........................156
Child Safety Locks ..........................25
Cigar Lighter ..............................86
Clean Air Gasoline .........................295
12
INDEX 335
Cleaning
Wheels ................................282
Climate Control ............................51
Automatic ..............................60
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance................326
Compact Spare Tire .........................280
Contract, Service ...........................330
Coolant (Antifreeze).........................298
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............260
Cooling System ............................257
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................259
Coolant Level ........................258, 260
Disposal Of Used Coolant ..................260
Drain, Flush, And Refill ....................258
Inspection ..............................260
Points To Remember ......................261
Pressure Cap ............................260
Radiator Cap ...........................260
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............258
Corrosion Protection ........................287
Cruise Light ...........................109, 110
Cupholders ...............................84
Customer Assistance ........................328
Daytime Running Lights ......................43
Dealer Service .............................249
Deck Lid, Emergency Release ...................71
Defroster, Windshield........................169
Diagnostic System, Onboard ...................111
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................260
Door Ajar.............................103, 104
Door Ajar Light ........................103, 104
Doors....................................23
Drag And Drop Menu .......................302
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ........................26
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water .................................204
Electrical Power Outlets.......................85
Electric Brake Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System ....................116
Electric Remote
Mirrors .......................40
Electronic Brake Control System ................117
Brake Assist System .......................117
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)................122
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .........189
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...............120
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........102
336 INDEX
Emergency Deck Lid Release ...................71
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking ............................220, 264
Jump Starting ...........................230
Towing ................................238
Emergency Trunk Release .....................71
Emission Control System Maintenance............112
Engine
Air Cleaner .............................251
Break-In Recommendations .................177
Checking Oil Level .......................247
Compartment ...........................247
Cooling ...............................257
Exhaust Gas Caution ...................168, 297
Fails To Start ............................177
Flooded, Starting .........................177
Fuel Requirements ........................294
Jump Starting ...........................230
Oil ...............................249, 298
Oil Filler Cap ...........................250
Oil Filter ...............................251
Oil Selection ............................250
Oil Synthetic ............................251
Overheating ............................233
Starting ...............................175
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .........148, 239
Ethanol..................................295
Exhaust Gas Cautions ....................168, 297
Exhaust System ........................168, 256
Exterior Lights ..........................42, 171
Filters
Air Cleaner .............................251
Air Conditioning ..........................62
Engine Fuel ............................298
Engine Oil .............................251
Engine Oil Disposal .......................251
Flashers .................................208
Hazard Warning .........................208
Turn
Signals .........................110,171
Flash-To-Pass ..............................43
Flooded Engine Starting ......................177
Fluid, Brake ..............................300
Fluid Capacities............................298
Fluid Leaks...............................171
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .................................262
Fluids And Lubricants .......................298
Fog Lights ................................44
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ....................32
12
INDEX 337
Fold-Flat Seats .............................26
Folding Rear Seat ...........................29
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ......................237
Fuel ....................................294
Adding ...............................198
Additives ..............................295
Capacity ...............................298
Clean Air ..............................295
Ethanol ...............................295
Gasoline ...............................294
Light .................................105
Materials Added .........................295
Methanol ..............................295
Octane Rating ...........................294
Requirements ...........................294
Tank Capacity ...........................298
Fueling..................................198
Fuses ...................................213
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)................77
Gasoline, Clean Air .........................295
Gasoline, (Fuel).........................294, 298
Gasoline, Reformulated ......................295
Gear Ranges ..............................181
Gear Selector Override.......................236
Glass Cleaning ............................290
GVWR ..................................201
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water ..........................204
Hazard Warning Flashers .....................208
Headlights ................................42
Cleaning ...............................287
Passing ................................43
Head Restraints ............................34
Heated Mirrors .............................41
Heated Steering Wheel .......................37
Hill Start Assist ............................118
Holder, Cup ...............................84
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)................77
Hood Prop ................................6
8
Hood Release ..............................68
Ignition ..................................18
Switch .................................18
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ......................20
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................38
Instrument Cluster ..........................90
Descriptions ............................110
338 INDEX
Display ................................92
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................290
Interior And Instrument Lights..................45
Interior Appearance Care .....................289
Interior Lights..............................45
Introduction ................................4
iPod/USB/MP3 Control......................316
Jacking Instructions .........................223
Jack Location .............................221
Jack Operation ......................220, 223, 264
Jump Starting .............................230
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs ..........17, 20
Key-In Reminder............................20
Keys ....................................16
Replacement .............................20
Sentry (Immobilizer) .......................20
Lap/Shoulder Belts .........................130
Latches..................................171
Hood ..................................68
Lead Free Gasoline .........................294
Leaks, Fluid ..............................171
Life Of Tires ..............................276
Liftgate ..................................70
Light Bulbs ...........................171, 208
Lighter
Cigar ..................................86
Lights ................................42, 171
AirBag.........................100, 138, 169
Brake Assist Warning ......................121
Brake Warning ..........................101
Bulb Replacement ........................208
Center Mounted Stop ......................213
Cruise .............................109, 110
Engine Temperature Warning ................102
Exterior ...............................171
Interior ................................45
Low Fuel ..............................105
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........105
Park ...............................43, 1
10
Passing ................................43
Seat Belt Reminder .......................102
Security Alarm........................21, 103
Service ................................208
Traction Control .........................121
Turn Signals .........................110,171
Vanity Mirror ............................41
12
INDEX 339
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . .102, 110
Loading Vehicle............................200
Tires..................................268
Locks
Child Protection ..........................25
Power Door .............................23
Lubrication, Body ..........................253
Lug Nuts ................................293
Maintenance Free Battery .....................248
Maintenance Schedule .......................243
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).....105, 112
Manual, Service............................332
Media Hub ...............................316
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ................26
Memory Seat ..............................26
Memory Seats And Radio .....................26
Methanol ................................295
Mirrors ..................................38
Automatic Dimming .......................38
Electric Powered ..........................40
Electric Remote ...........................40
Heated .................................41
Rearview ...............................38
Vanity .................................41
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ................5
Monitor, Tire Pressure System..................123
Mopar Parts ..............................331
MP3 Control ..............................316
Multi-Function Control Lever ...................42
New Vehicle Break-In Period ..................177
Occupant Restraints.........................127
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .................294
Oil Change Indicator .........................94
Reset ..................................94
Oil, Engine............................249, 298
Capacity ...............................298
Change Interval .........................249
Checking ..............................247
Disposal ...............................251
Filter .................................251
Filter Disposal ...........................251
Identification Logo .......................250
Materials
Added To .......................251
Pressure Warning Light ....................103
Recommendation .....................250, 298
Synthetic ..............................251
Viscosity ...............................250
340 INDEX
Oil Filter, Change ..........................251
Oil Filter, Selection..........................251
Oil Pressure Light ..........................103
Onboard Diagnostic System ...................111
Operating Precautions .......................111
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ...............5
Overheating, Engine ........................233
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ...........5,332
Paint Care................................287
Parking Brake .............................178
ParkSense System, Rear ......................193
Personalized Main Menu .....................302
Pets ....................................167
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...........268
Power
Brakes ................................292
Door Locks ..............................23
Mirrors ................................40
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .............85
Seats ..................................30
Sunroof ................................65
Power Steering Fluid ........................300
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ................135
Preparation For Jacking ......................222
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................135
Radial Ply Tires ............................274
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap).............260
Radio Frequency
General Information .....................18, 21
Radio Operation ...........................317
Rear Camera ..............................197
Rear Liftgate...............................70
Rear Seat, Folding ...........................29
Reclining Rear Seats .........................30
Recreational Towing.........................203
Reformulated Gasoline.......................295
Refrigerant ...............................253
Release, Hood..............................68
Reminder, Seat Belt .........................129
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming
Additional Key Fobs .............20
Replacement Bulbs .........................208
Replacement Keys ...........................20
Replacement Tires ..........................277
Reporting Safety Defects .....................331
Restraints, Child ...........................151
Restraints, Head ............................34
12
INDEX 341
Rotation, Tires.............................284
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ...................169
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .................171
Safety Defects, Reporting .....................331
Safety, Exhaust Gas .........................168
Safety Information, Tire ......................264
Safety Tips ...............................168
Schedule, Maintenance.......................243
Seat Belt Maintenance .......................289
Seat Belts .............................129, 169
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........136
Child Restraints .........................151
Energy Management Feature ................135
Front Seat .......................129, 130, 133
Inspection ..............................169
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................130
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............134
Operating Instructions .....................133
Pregnant Women .........................135
Pretensioners ...........................135
Rear Seat ..............................130
Reminder ...........................102, 129
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................135
Untwisting Procedure .....................134
Seats ....................................26
Adjustment .............................26
Fold And Tumble Rear .....................32
Power .................................30
Rear Folding ..........................26, 29
Reclining ...............................28
Seatback Release ..........................26
Tilting .................................26
Security Alarm ..........................21, 103
Sentry Key
Key Programming .........................20
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ......................20
Service Assistance ..........................328
Service Contract ...........................330
Service Manuals ...........................332
Settings .................................304
Shift
Lever Override ........................236
Shoulder Belts.............................130
Signals, Turn...........................110,171
Siri.....................................323
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ....................283
Snow Tires ...............................279
Spare Tires.........................279, 280, 281
Spark Plugs ..............................298
342 INDEX
Speed Control
Cancel ................................192
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .................189
Starting .................................175
Automatic Transmission ....................175
Button .................................18
Cold Weather ...........................176
Engine Fails To Start ......................177
Steering
Tilt Column .............................37
Wheel, Heated ...........................37
Wheel, Tilt ..............................37
Steering Wheel Audio Controls .................315
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .315
Storage ..................................286
Storage, Vehicle.............................61
Stuck, Freeing .............................237
Sun Roof .................................65
Sun Visor Extension .........................41
Synthetic Engine Oil ........................251
Telescoping Steering Column ...................37
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............60
Tilt Steering Column .........................37
Tire And Loading Information Placard............268
Tire Markings .............................265
Tires..........................171, 272, 279, 285
Aging (Life Of Tires) ......................276
Air Pressure ............................272
Chains ................................283
Changing ...........................220, 264
Compact Spare ..........................280
General Information ...................272, 279
High Speed .............................274
Inflation Pressure ........................273
Jacking ............................220, 264
Life Of Tires ............................276
Load Capacity .......................268, 269
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........106, 123
Quality Grading .........................285
Radial ................................274
Replacement ............................277
Rotation ...............................284
Safety .............................264, 272
Snow
Tires .............................279
Spare Tires ..........................279, 281
Spinning ...............................275
Tread Wear Indicators .....................275
Wheel Nut Torque ........................293
Tire Safety Information.......................264
12
INDEX 343
To Open Hood .............................68
Towing ..................................202
Disabled Vehicle .........................238
Recreational ............................203
Towing Behind A Motorhome ..................203
Traction .................................204
Traction Control ...........................118
Trailer Towing.............................202
Transmission
Automatic .......................179, 180, 263
Maintenance ............................263
Transporting Pets ..........................167
Tread Wear Indicators .......................275
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid).........................71
Trunk Release, Emergency .....................71
Turn Signals ..............................110
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings ........................304
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features .............304
Uconnect Voice Command ....................318
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................285
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ........77
Universal Transmitter ........................77
Unleaded Gasoline .........................294
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................134
USB....................................316
Vanity Mirrors .............................41
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............292
Vehicle Loading ........................200, 269
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations.................5
Vehicle Security Alarm........................21
Vehicle Storage..........................61, 286
Voice Recognition System (VR) .................318
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions). . . .105
Warnings And Cautions .......................5
Warranty Information .......................331
Washer
Adding Fluid ...........................248
Washers, Windshield .........................47
Washing Vehicle ...........................288
Water
Driving Thr
ough .........................204
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................282
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................282
Wind Buffeting ..........................65, 67
Window Fogging ...........................61
344 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
WARNING:
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
passenger vehicle or off-road highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing
exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or
wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
FIAT is a registered trademark of FCA Group
Marketing S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC.
18BG-126-AD
Fourth Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
